JP5178217B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine that has a plurality of reels that can repeatedly execute rotation display and stop display by an operation by a player, and that can execute medal payout according to a combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped and displayed. Are known.

  That is, in such a slot machine, first, the player inserts medals. Next, the plurality of reels are rotated and displayed by operating the start lever. Then, by operating the stop button, the reels in the rotation display state are stopped and displayed. That is, when the combination of symbols when the reels are stopped and displayed in this way is a specific combination (winning combination), a game is executed in which a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. For example, when winning (winning) a bonus combination (special prize combination) such as a big bonus (abbreviated BB, the same shall apply hereinafter) or a regular bonus (abbreviated RB, the same shall apply hereinafter), a large number of medals will be used as a trigger. Bonus games that can be acquired over the games are played.

By the way, in recent years, it has been proposed that such a slot machine is also provided with a liquid crystal display device in which a display effect suggesting information on whether or not the bonus game is performed is provided (for example, Patent Document 1). In such a slot machine, even when the bonus combination is not won, it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of expectation freely, thereby improving the game entertainment.
JP 2007-301137 A

  However, in the conventional slot machine, if the result of a display effect with a sense of expectation on the liquid crystal display device is contrary to that expectation, the player may use the liquid crystal as a retaliation measure for such betrayal. There are cases where the display screen of the display device is hit, and an appropriate solution to such a hit action is desired.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of prompting a player to suppress a pressing action on a display screen.

  In order to achieve such an object, in the invention described in claim 1, main control means for controlling the progress of the game, a display device having a dot matrix type display screen partitioned into a plurality of pixels, The content of the display effect appearing on the display screen is determined based on the state information relating to the progress of the game acquired from the main control means, and a drive signal corresponding to the content of the determined display effect is sent to the plurality of the display effects. Sub-control means for performing display control for the display device by outputting each pixel separately, and the sub-control means, when there is a pressing action on the front transparent plate of the display device, A pressure act judging means for judging the position where the pressure act was applied and the magnitude of the force applied by the press act, and the magnitude of the force given by the pressure act judging means is a predetermined value. A damaged portion determining means for classifying the plurality of pixels into either a normal assumption pixel or an abnormal assumption pixel based on the position where the pressurizing action is performed when it is determined that the value is exceeded. The abnormal assumption pixel of the normal assumption pixel and the abnormality assumption pixel classified by the damaged portion determination means has a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect. Thus, for the normal assumed pixel, the display mode at the time of abnormality appears only on a part of the dot matrix type display screen by outputting a drive signal in accordance with the content of the determined display effect. The gist of the invention is that the control of the game by the main control means can be continued.

  As described above, in a gaming machine, if the result of a game production with a sense of expectation on the display device is contrary to that expectation, the player strikes the display device as a retaliatory measure against such a betrayal act. There is a concern to do. On the other hand, when there is such a beating action, for example, it is conceivable to perform a damage process (for example, turning off the power) that suggests that the gaming machine is broken. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to appeal the fragility of the gaming machine, and thereby it is possible to promote the suppression of the beating action by the player.

  However, since it is rare for a gaming machine to be broken just by striking the display device, in such a gaming machine, it is easy for the player to say that the above-described damage processing is only a kind of production. There is a concern that will be recognized. And once it is recognized by the player in this way, there is a possibility that the display device is likely to be beaten in order to see such an effect. In addition, some players feel disgusted that the game can be interrupted even though the gaming machine is not actually broken.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, when the sub control unit of the main control unit and the sub control unit performs a pressurizing action on the front transparent plate of the display device, A pressure act judging means for judging the position and the magnitude of the force applied by the pressure act, and determining that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold by the pressure act judging means And a damaged portion determining means for classifying the plurality of pixels into either normal assumed pixels or abnormal assumed pixels separately from the pixels based on the position where the pressing action is performed. While the abnormal assumption pixel out of the normal assumption pixel and the abnormality assumption pixel classified by the damaged portion determination means, a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect appears. For the normal assumed pixels, the display mode at the time of abnormality appears only on a part of the dot matrix type display screen by outputting a drive signal in accordance with the content of the determined display effect. Thus, the control related to the progress of the game by the main control means can be continued.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to continue the control by the portion of the gaming machine that is difficult to be adversely affected by the strike (such as control related to the progress of the game), and only the portion that is easily affected by the strike (display screen) appears to be damaged. It becomes like this. In addition, only the above-described abnormal assumed pixels that are selected based on the hit position on the display screen appear to be damaged. Therefore, a person who strikes the display screen has to be aware of the possibility that the display device has been damaged due to the real situation that only the part that has been beaten in this way has an adverse effect. And from the fear of being held socially responsible for such actions, he will be careful not to do such actions thereafter.

  In addition, as a specific method for classifying a plurality of pixels into either normal assumption pixels or abnormal assumption pixels separately from those pixels, the following is possible: In addition to “a method of appropriately classifying normal assumed pixels and abnormal assumed pixels based on them (direct classification method)”, a plurality of pixels are classified in advance into normal assumed pixels and abnormal assumed pixels. A method to selectively use the most corresponding data based on the position where the pressurization action was performed after preparing the multiple pressurization data. Etc. can also be adopted.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prompt the player to suppress the act of pressurizing the display screen.

  DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking as an example a slot machine which is a revolving game machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, and FIG. ) Is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the connector portion, FIG. 4B is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the gaming unit with the front opening / closing member opened as seen from the front upper right. FIG. 6, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming unit, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the gaming unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIGS. 8A and 8B are main parts of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 10 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 11 and 12 are exploded perspective views showing a state where the connector is disassembled from the connector holder. Figure 13 shows the connector holder FIG. 14 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view of the connector portion, FIG. 15 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing a state where the connector portion is moved, and FIG. 16A is a perspective view showing a connection holding state of the connector. FIG. 16B is a perspective view of the binding band used at that time, FIG. 17 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view showing the connector holding state, and FIG. 18 is an exploded view of the front opening / closing member and the effect display device. FIG. 19 is an enlarged perspective view of the front opening / closing member as seen from the front upper right, FIG. 20 is a longitudinal sectional view of the state in which the front opening / closing member and the effect display device are combined, and a perspective view of the metal fitting, FIG. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable symbol display device viewed from the upper right, FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the variable symbol display device, and FIG. Exploded perspective view seen from upper right 25 is an exploded perspective view of the reel in an exploded state viewed from the upper left front, FIG. 26 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, and FIG. 28 is a guide for the case member. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal discharge device omitted, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the heatsink opening from the back side of the slot machine, FIG. 33 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, and FIG. 34 is a front view of the power supply device viewed from the lower left front. 35 is a perspective view, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the side plate of the outer main body and the power supply device, FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the door-shaped front member with a transparent plate, and FIG. Disassembled / assembled perspective view, FIG. 38 shows a hinge gold FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. 41 is the door-shaped front member. The perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part, Fig.42 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool longitudinally, FIG.42 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the protrusion state of a coupling tool, FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, and FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present invention is attached to a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and to the front surface of the outer main body 100 so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape with a rotating shaft 100a. A vertically-long rectangular door-shaped front member 200, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 that is detachable from the outer main body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface, and an optional And an image display 500 that displays the image of the above. As shown in FIG. 18, the image display body 500 includes a front opening / closing member 501 made of resin and an effect display device 590 attached to the front side.

[Game unit]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present invention includes a gaming unit 50 that is accommodated in an outer body 100 in a detachable and replaceable state. As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming unit 50 is detachably attached to the inside of the outer main body 100, and is provided on the front surface of the case member 400 having a case member 400 having at least a part of the front surface opened. The door-shaped front member 200 has a front opening / closing member 501 that is rotatable in the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200 and is supported so as to be freely movable between a closed position and an open position. Then, the symbol variation display device 300 is assembled to the upper part inside the case member 400, and the main control board 409 is mounted inside (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6). An opening 516 that allows the variable display device 300 to be visually recognized is provided, and an effect display device 590 is mounted below the front opening 516 of the front opening / closing member 501 (in FIG. 6, the opening 591a of the decorative member 591) (see FIG. 6). 6), a peripheral control board 510 is mounted on the back surface of the front opening / closing member 501.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the gaming unit 50 includes a main control system wiring in which game unit side wiring connected to the case side electrical components including the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 is connected to the main control board 409. As shown in FIG. 8, a main control system wiring connection connector 425 attached to the main control system wiring 424 and a peripheral control system wiring 426 connected to the peripheral control board 510 are divided. A connector holder 428 that collectively supports peripheral control system wiring connection connectors 427 attached to the peripheral control system wirings 426 is provided.

[Outside body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102, 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. Further, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) penetrations are made in the area facing the upper rail (not shown) of the gaming machine installation island in a state where it is installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). Holes 132 are formed.

[Outer body-divider]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIG. 1, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. , 102 is fixed to the inner surface, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical protrusion while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening (not shown) for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space]
In a space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharge device 110 that discharges a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 (see FIG. 2) at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal release A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing medals overflowing from the device 110, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal discharge device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a hopper 110b for storing medals to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a and is located in the hopper 110b. The medals are sent one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. 104a is established.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find unauthorized work on the power supply board 112s (see FIG. 34) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 34) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b. One side of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It has become a specification to sneak in. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 35 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed into a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102 and the tip is fitted into the groove 102c. It comes to include.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, The power supply board 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the power supply board 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the apparatus case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 34) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a Even if the height is shifted, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protruding piece inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. 112m-1 and a vertical projecting piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Accordingly, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is drawn out from the bulging portion. However, even if the power cord is bundled at this position, there is a high risk that the cord will be grounded. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or may get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of this example extends the cord outlet 104b from the upper side to the upper side and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the installation is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, the fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, so that it is easy to visually recognize and be surely fixed particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104 a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104 a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process or cost hardly occurs. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in this example, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Further, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a heat generation countermeasure for the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Upper space]
On the other hand, a case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as a core of the wiring means described later is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. Further, a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation is formed on the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[Door type front member]
2 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, a 1-bet button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main control board 409, which will be described later, Similarly, a MAX bet button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) that can be used in one game, and a medal return button for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. 208, a stored medal release button 209 for inputting a medal storage release command (release command by settlement) stored as data in the memory of the main control board 409, and a start lever for operating the symbol variation display device 300 210 and three reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped. Lumpur stop button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when the game state is waiting for the player to insert a medal, the flow path is set to the medal tub 212 side. In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position that covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the medal tub 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that passes through the medal bowl 212 reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[Door-shaped front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and its upper half is a see-through window 214 for games covered with a transparent plate 214a. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 in the image display body 500 can be seen side by side, and are integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The area of the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 is visually divided into upper and lower parts by the forehead frame 216. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590, the arrangement of the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 can be changed. Even if it is changed upside down, it can be used as it is. Note that the transparent plate 214a is not necessarily a colorless and transparent plate, and has a transparency that allows the player to visually recognize the symbols of the symbol variation display device 300 and the display screen of the effect display device 590. What is necessary is just to be provided as a transparent plate (translucent plate).

[Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IRD30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used). The edge members 214b and 214b bulge to the front side with the side facing the player as the front surface at the periphery of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom. , 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. The edge member 214b is a pair of members that are arranged with the left-right direction as the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the door-shaped front member 200, and a pair of members that are directed downward from both ends of the member (edge member 214b) arranged in the left-right direction. Member (edge member 214b). That is, the edge member 214b extending in the left-right direction straddles the pair of edge members 214b. Note that the edge member 214b extending in the left-right direction and the pair of edge members 214b are integrally formed, but may be formed of separate members.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear side (a solid structure that is not solid but has a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In FIG. 36, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. The reflection members 217 b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set to have an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217 a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. Further, the reflecting member 217 b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the upper side is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217 a toward the upper side of the slot machine 1.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment is configured as described above, and the bottom of the plate-like side from the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the concave groove 219 (see FIG. 1) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted diagonally and fitted into a joinery type, with the transparent plate 214a standing upright in this state to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and from the back of the door-shaped front member 200 It fixes with the screw 603 (refer FIG. 1) which let it pass. FIG. 36 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 36, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[Door-type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 21, the symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, for example, three reels 301 a, 301 b, 301 c (hereinafter referred to as each reel 301) that can be individually rotated, A device case 302 that incorporates and accommodates reels 301 is provided, and a game is played with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surface of each reel 301.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the device case 302 includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, a right side plate 306, a left side plate 307, and a partially arcuate rear plate 308 that covers the rear surface. It is an enclosed box shape, and a part of the arc of each reel 301 protrudes from the front of the device case 302. In addition, as for the device case 302, only the bottom part board 304 is formed with the metal plate, and the other part is formed with resin.

  Mounting ears 306a and 307a projecting outward in the left and right directions are formed at the front upper end portions of the right side plate 306 and the left side plate 307, respectively, and screws (not shown) are inserted through substantially the center of the mounting ears 306a and 307a. Through-holes 306b and 307b (see FIG. 21) that can be made are penetrated in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, the bottom plate 304 is provided with a plurality of (for example, three) hanging pieces bent in the vertical direction in the left-right direction, and penetrates these hanging pieces in the front-rear direction. A through hole is formed. Then, the mounting ears 306 a and 307 a are fixed to the reinforcing member 407 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper front end of the case member 400 with screws, and the drooping piece is laterally located above the center of the case member 400. The symbol variation display device 300 is attached to the case member 400 by being fixed to the reinforcing bar 402 provided with screws. As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of screw holes 302a into which screws 313a and 313b for fixing each reel 301 are screwed are formed at a predetermined interval on the front edge of the device case 302. The lower screw 313b is a normal male screw, but a tapping screw is used for the upper screw 313a because the object to be screwed is a resin molded product.

  A cover body 309 is assembled on the front side of the device case 302. The cover body 309 is constructed between a frame-shaped frame portion 310 formed along the front edge of the device case 302 and the upper and lower ends of the frame portion 310, and each reel 301 incorporated in the device case 302 is attached to the cover body 309. It is comprised from the partition part 311 arrange | positioned at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction so that it may partition. In addition, the front surface of the partition part 311 is formed in a substantially arc shape so that the center part in the vertical direction protrudes most toward the player side. That is, the gaps between the reels 301 are closed from the front, and are formed in an arc shape so as to be continuous with the circumferential surface of each reel 301. In addition, the partition part 311 arranged on both the left and right sides is integrally formed with a shielding part 311a that shields the mechanisms in the both-side reels 301a and 301c from the left and right outer sides. In addition, mounting holes 312 through which screws 313a and 313b can be inserted are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the partition part 311 in the frame part 310.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 23, a reel main relay board 315 and a backlight relay board 318 covered with a board case 314 are arranged on the left side plate 307 of the apparatus case 302, and the reel main relay board is arranged. Each reel 301 is individually driven and controlled by the drive signal relayed by 315. The reel main relay board 315 is provided with two connectors 316a and 316c protruding through the opening of the board case 314, and the backlight relay board 318 is provided with two connectors 316b and 316d protruding through the opening of the board case 314. It has been.

  In the reel main relay board 315, a signal for driving and controlling each reel 301 and a motor power supply are relayed through a connector 316a protruding from the lower left side of the board case 314. The detection signal sent from the photosensor 325 accommodated in 301 is relayed to the main control board 409. The connector 316c protruding from the bottom surface of the substrate case 314 has a connector-attached harness (connector 317 protruding from the rear plate 308 of the device case 302) provided on the reel motor relay substrate 326 (described later). (Not shown) are coupled to each other so that a drive signal and motor power can be supplied to the reel motor 321 accommodated in each reel 301 and a detection signal can be received from the photosensor 325.

  In the backlight relay board 318, a connector (illustrated) is connected to a connector 316b protruding from the upper surface of the board case 314 through a through hole 308a connected to the backlight 322 described later and formed in the rear plate 308. Not) is connected. In other words, the power source for operation is applied to the backlight 322 via the connector 316b. The operating power is supplied to the backlight relay board 318 via a connector 316d provided at the center of the left side surface of the board case 314.

  The harness with a connector includes one or a plurality of electric wires having different covering colors for each reel 301, and each backlight housed in each reel 301. Connected to 322 is an electric wire of the same color as the color of the electric wire included in the harness with a connector. That is, the color of the harness and the electric wire is set to be different for each reel 301. According to this, it is possible to perform color matching between a harness including an electric wire that supplies electric power to the reel motor 321 and an electric wire that receives a detection signal from the photosensor 325, and an electric wire that supplies electric power to the backlight 322. In addition, it becomes easy to collate the electric wire with each reel 301 (that is, check whether there is a miswiring), and it is possible to check the arrangement position of each reel 301 based on the color of the electric wire. That is, in the assembly process of the slot machine 1, the arrangement order of the left, middle, and right reels 301 is an extremely important item that should not be mistaken. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the process has been performed correctly, and the quality of the slot machine 1 can be ensured.

  In addition, a U-shaped slit 333 that penetrates the left side plate 307 is formed above the substrate case 314 in the left side plate 307. It is possible to bind together with the plate 307. In particular, since the latching portion 333a having only the lower end connected by the roll-shaped U-shaped slit 333 opened at the lower side is integrally formed with the left side plate 307, the latching portion 333a is bent in a state where a part of the binding band is bent. If it is inserted above, it becomes possible to hook the binding band to the latching portion 333a very easily. That is, in order to hook the binding band to the left side plate 307, in the case where two holes are drilled in the left side plate 307, the tip of the binding band must be inserted through the two holes in order, Although the bundling work may be difficult, if the U-shaped slit 333 is provided, the electric wire can be hooked from the upper side of the hooking portion 333a, and workability is improved. In addition, it is conceivable to form the hook so as to protrude outward from the left side plate 307, but this is not preferable because the configuration becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost such as the mold cost becomes high.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, in the apparatus case 302, each reel 301, a reel motor 321 that rotatably supports each reel 301 and applies a rotational force, and a right side of each reel 301 are arranged. A motor mounting plate 320 that fixes the reel motor 321 and a motor mounting plate 320 that is fixedly mounted on the motor mounting plate 320 and that is arranged along the inner surface of each reel 301, particularly along the player side. A substantially arc-shaped backlight 322 that emits light to the side is provided.

  More specifically, the reel motor 321 is a DC step motor that can rotate forward and backward, and a flange 323 is fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 321a. The flange 323 is a substantially disk-like member, and a fitting part 323a notched in a radial direction is formed on a part of the circumferential surface, and a protrusion 323b provided with a male screw part on the circumferential surface. Is formed. Correspondingly, the reel 301a has the right side surface (the back side surface in FIG. 25) generally open, but the left side surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25) has a substantially cross-shaped side surface. A member 330 is provided, and a flange 323 of the reel motor 321 can be attached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the central portion of the side member 330 has a through hole 330a through which the protrusion 323b of the flange 323 is inserted, and a circular accommodation portion 330b that can accommodate the flange 323 inside. In particular, as shown in FIG. 24, the circular accommodating portion 330b has an anti-rotation protrusion 330c that protrudes toward the inside of the reel 301 and that can be fitted to the fitting portion 323a of the flange 323. Is formed. A lock screw 324 is screwed into a protrusion 323b that passes through the through-hole 330a and protrudes outward from the circular housing portion 330b, whereby the flange 323 of the reel motor 321 is fixed to the side member 330 of the reel 301a. Installed in condition. That is, the rotation shaft 321 a of the reel motor 321 is directly connected to the side member 330 of the reel 301. Since each reel 301 is fixed on the shaft center by a lock screw 324, a force in the diametrical direction does not act, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation shaft 321a from shaking.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the motor mounting plate 320 is formed of a metal plate and includes a motor mounting portion 320a for mounting the reel motor 321 and a light mounting portion 320b for mounting the backlight 322. Yes. A mounting piece 320c bent in the vertical direction is formed on the front side (player side) of the upper and lower ends of the motor mounting plate 320, and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the mounting piece 320c. A through hole 320d is formed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 23, these through-holes 320d are provided at positions that match the mounting holes 312 formed in the cover body 309 and the screw holes 302a formed in the device case 302 in the front-rear direction. . That is, from the front of the cover body 309, the screws 313 a and 313 b are screwed into the screw holes 302 a of the apparatus case 302 through the mounting holes 312 of the cover body 309 and the through holes 320 d of the motor mounting plate 320. On the other hand, the motor mounting plate 320 and the cover body 309 are assembled in a fixed state. That is, the cover body 309 and the motor mounting plate 320 are fastened together with the device case 302. For this reason, compared with what fixes the cover body 309 and the motor attachment plate 320 separately with respect to the apparatus case 302, while reducing a work process, three members, ie, the cover body 309, the motor attachment plate 320, and an apparatus. The mutual positioning in the case 302 can be performed accurately and easily. As a result, the clearance of the cover body 309 with respect to each reel 301 can be reduced, and the gap between the reels 301 can be closed with high accuracy. In other words, the internal structure of the device case 302 can be made more difficult to see, and deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

  In addition, an extended lower portion 320e extending rearward is formed on the lower rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320, and the reel motor relay is provided at a corner portion formed by the extended lower portion 320e and the motor mounting portion 320a. A substrate 326 is attached. The reel motor relay board 326 includes an electric wire (not shown) connected to the reel motor 321, an electric wire (not shown) connected to the photo sensor 325, and a harness with a connector (not shown) connected to the reel main relay board 315. ) And a connector 317 (see FIG. 22) and the like are mounted. Further, an extended upper portion 320g extending in the same direction as the extended lower portion 320e is formed on the upper rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320, and the extended upper portion 320g is connected to the backlight 322. A groove (not shown) for guiding an electric wire (not shown) and an electric wire presser 327 for preventing the electric wire wired in the groove from deviating from the groove are attached. The wire retainer 327 is made of a transparent and elastically deformable thin plate-like resin member, and one end thereof is fixed by a screw 327a.

  In this way, by holding the electric wire in an appropriate position by the cooperation of the groove portion and the electric wire presser 327, the floating state of the electric wire can be prevented without providing a substrate such as the reel motor relay substrate 326. It can be avoided that the electric wire becomes an obstacle and the rotation of each reel 301 is braked or the electric wire is caught during the rotation. A bundling member 328 that holds the electric wires connected to the reel motor 321 and the electric wires connected to the backlight 322 in a state of being collected is attached to the motor attachment plate 320 in front of the electric wire presser 327.

  An attachment piece 320f having an L-shaped cross section is erected on the rear end side of the motor attachment plate 320 toward each reel 301 to support the photosensor 325. The photosensor 325 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that face each other, and outputs a signal according to whether light emitted from the light emitting unit reaches the light receiving unit. As shown in FIG. 24, a light shielding piece 331 that passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the photosensor 325 is provided on the inner surface side of the side member 330 in each reel 301 each time the reel 301 rotates once. Projects inward. That is, every time the reel 301 is rotated once, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is shielded and a signal corresponding to the light is output.

  By the way, since the light shielding piece 331 blocks light emitted from the light emitting portion, it is preferably formed of an opaque member, for example, a black member. On the other hand, the side member 330 of the reel 301a is integrated with the reel 301a. Therefore, it is preferably formed from a light transmissive member such as a transparent member. For this reason, the light shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 cannot be integrally formed, and means for attaching the light shielding piece 331 to the side member 330 is required. However, in the case of attaching via a fastening member such as a screw, the degree of the center of gravity of the entire reel 301 including the light shielding piece 331 being eccentric from the rotation axis is high, and there is a possibility that the rotational speed of the reel 301a may be uneven. In addition, when the light shielding piece 331 is bonded with an adhesive, it is difficult to position the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330, and thus the rotational position of each reel 301 may not be accurately detected.

  Therefore, in this example, the light shielding piece 331 is formed by insert molding. That is, the light-shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 are integrally formed by placing a previously formed light-shielding piece 331 in a mold and injection-molding the reel 301a and the side member 330. According to this, it can be formed relatively easily and the positioning accuracy of the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330 can be increased.

  The backlight 322 has a substantially arc-shaped appearance, and three LEDs 322a arranged at predetermined intervals are provided on the side of the motor mounting plate 320 that contacts the light mounting portion 320b toward the side member 330 side. It is arranged to emit light. In addition, on the inner surface side of each reel 301, a white reflecting portion 322 b that reflects light emitted from each LED 322 a toward the symbol row (not shown) of the reel 301 is formed. For this reason, surface light emission can be performed on the inner side of the reel 301a, and the symbols positioned on the player side, particularly the three symbols, can be illuminated with substantially uniform light by substantially uniform light.

[Case material]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the case member 400 is erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403. A box having an opening 401 on the front surface. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the bottom plate 403, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404. It is.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. Then, the area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area of the effect display device 590, the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area of the symbol variation display apparatus 300, and the image display body An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main control board 409, which is a main control board, is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the control board 409 (for example, a peripheral control board 510 described later) is also arranged in the wiring work space 408. Here, the main control board 409 controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the operation unit 202 or the like. In addition, the peripheral control board 510 performs predetermined effect control according to the progress of the game.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has through holes 132, 132... (See FIG. 1) of the outer main body 100. It exists in the area | region including the intersection with the axis line which passes, and it is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Note that by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the boss holes 114 are pre-processed on the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 114 (see FIG. 1). The bosses 410 and 410 are provided near the wiring window 411 described later, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer main body 100 side are provided near the wiring relay member 113, thereby the case member 400. Positioning of the wiring relay member 113 between the wiring window 411 and the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 7, and the concave step portion 412 is formed on the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 (see FIG. 1). Fit together. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. As described above, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 29, a convex rail member 116 is laid on or integrally formed with the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by stoppers 117, 117, 117 in the form of swinging levers shown in FIGS. 1 and 26 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIG. 1, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and the two fixtures 118, 118 suspended from the top plate 103, and the case member 400 is shown by a solid line in FIG. 26 is manually switched between an operating posture that engages with a part thereof and a non-operating posture that does not engage with the case member 400 as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. . In addition, if the stopper 117 is formed in a key shape as shown in FIG. 27 and is engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. Can do.

  Moreover, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a side plate 404 of the case member 400 and a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406, and the case member 400 is fixed to a predetermined position. Switching between the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be performed from the inside of the case member 400 in a state of being pushed into the position.

[Image display]
The effect display device 590 in the image display body 500 can display an image including, for example, at least a liquid crystal display (in addition, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, which is a so-called dot matrix display screen). This panel-type unit is attached to the front side of a front opening / closing member 501 (see FIG. 18) that closes the front opening of the case member 400 so as to be openable and closable. As shown in FIG. 18, the front opening / closing member 501 is a part in which a region 2/3 from the lower side accommodates the effect display device 590, and a region 1/3 from the upper side is arranged in front of the symbol variation display device 300. It has become a part. That is, on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, a housing portion 515 having a peripheral wall 515a formed therein is provided, and the effect display device 590 is housed in a region 2/3 from the lower side, and 1 / The decorative member 591 is accommodated in the third area. The front opening / closing member 501 and the decoration member 591 are formed with openings 516 and 591a for visually recognizing the symbol variation display device 300 arranged in the case member 400 from the front of the game unit 50, respectively. A gaming state display board 450 having various LEDs for displaying a gaming state (the number of bets, the number of credits, an error, etc.) related to the slot machine 1 on the right side of the opening 516 on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a substrate case unit 551 that accommodates a peripheral control substrate 510, a small substrate case 554, and the like are assembled on the rear surface side of the front opening / closing member 501. The substrate case unit 551 is made of a transparent resin member, covers the bottom surface side of the peripheral control substrate 510 (that is, the surface on the front opening / closing member 501 side), covers the upper surface side of the peripheral control substrate 510, and covers the substrate case. The substrate case upper part 553 is detachably attached to the lower part 552. Therefore, when the front opening / closing member 501 is opened, the substrate case unit 551 that accommodates the peripheral control board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability with respect to the peripheral control board 510 can be significantly improved. . In addition, the effect display device 590 and the peripheral control board 510 can be integrally configured, and the handling is facilitated, and the complexity of the wiring work space 408 in the case member 400 can be suppressed.

  However, as described above, when the effect display device 590 is arranged on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 and the substrate case unit 551 is arranged on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the back side of the effect display device 590 is Since it is covered with the front opening / closing member 501, there is a risk that it may be difficult to ground as a noise countermeasure for the effect display device 590, or the appearance may be reduced by a ground wire or the like.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a horizontally-long rectangular opening 520 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the housing 515 of the front opening / closing member 501 in which the effect display device 590 is housed. In addition, a conductive metal fitting 522 having a substantially U-shaped cross section is provided so as to straddle the front and back surfaces of the front opening / closing member 501 through the opening 520. The metal fitting 522 is made of an elastic metal piece, and the front portion 523 located on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 is in contact with the metal plate 521 (shield plate) on the back surface of the effect display device 590. A rear portion 525 located on the back side of 501 is connected to the ground wire 527. That is, the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the effect display device 590 is electrically grounded via the ground wire 527 and the metal fitting 522, and noise intrusion to the effect display device 590 is suppressed. Yes. Thus, since the effect display device 590 attached to the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 is connected to the ground wire 527 on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the effect display device 590 is attached to the front opening / closing member 501. The ground wire 527 can be connected later, and the ground wire 527 is wired between the front opening / closing member 501 and the peripheral control board 510 (board case unit 551). Can be suppressed.

  Further, the front opening / closing member 501 is provided with a screw hole 529 that allows the male screw 530 to be screwed therein. When the male screw 530 is screwed from behind the front opening / closing member 501, the front opening / closing member 501 protrudes from the front surface. Further, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 is pressed from the back side by the tip portion of the male screw 530. That is, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 is elastically deformed by the propulsive force of the male screw 530 and biased toward the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the effect display device 590. For this reason, after attaching the effect display device 590 to the front surface side of the front opening / closing member 501, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be brought into pressure contact with the metal plate 521 of the effect display device 590 only by screwing the male screw 530. As a result, the metal fitting 522 and the metal plate 521 can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  Further, the rear portion 525 of the metal fitting 522 is provided with a through hole 526 into which the male screw 530 can be inserted. When the male screw 530 is screwed into the screw hole 529 of the front opening / closing member 501 through the through hole 526 The metal fitting 522 is fixed to the front opening / closing member 501. In other words, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be elastically deformed toward the metal plate 521 of the effect display device 590 using the male screw 530 for fixing the metal fitting 522 to the front opening / closing member 501. By using the male screw 530 in this way, the configuration is simplified and the number of work steps is reduced, so that the cost can be reduced.

  A Y-shaped terminal 528 is crimped to the tip of the ground wire 527, and the ground wire 527 is connected to the rear portion 525 of the metal fitting 522 by attaching the Y-shaped terminal 528 to the metal fitting 522. In particular, in this example, when the male screw 530 is screwed into the screw hole 529 of the front opening / closing member 501 through the through hole 526 of the rear portion 525, it is screwed with the Y-shaped terminal 528 sandwiched between the rear portion 525 and the male screw 530. It is. That is, by screwing one male screw 530, the Y-terminal 528 can be fixed in addition to the attachment of the metal fitting 522 and the elastic deformation of the front side portion 523. For this reason, the entire configuration is further simplified and the number of work steps can be further reduced.

  The metal fitting 522 has a concave receiving portion 524 formed on the back surface of the front portion 523. When the male screw 530 is screwed into the front opening / closing member 501, the tip of the male screw 530 contacts the receiving portion 524. It comes to touch. For this reason, when the male screw 530 is screwed in, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be prevented from escaping from the propulsion direction (axial direction) of the male screw 530, and the front portion 523 is reliably pressed toward the effect display device 590. Is possible. The receiving portion 524 of the front portion 523 may be formed in a convex shape, and a concave recess may be provided at the tip of the male screw 530. Even with this configuration, the front portion 523 can effectively escape. Can be prevented.

  Further, the U-shaped metal fitting 522 is fixed in a state in which the open portion is directed downward and is hooked on the lower edge of the opening 520. For this reason, when attaching the metal fitting 522 to the front opening / closing member 501, it is possible to hold the metal fitting 522 in a hooked state without supporting the metal fitting 522 by hand. Therefore, for example, it is possible to work with one hand. In particular, when the metal fitting 522 is hooked on the lower edge of the opening 520, the mounting through hole 526 formed in the metal fitting 522 and the screw hole 529 formed in the front opening / closing member 501 overlap each other. Since it is set, the alignment between the through hole 526 and the screw hole 529 can be performed very easily, and workability can be improved.

  Further, a concave / convex surface 550 is formed on the rear surface side of the front opening / closing member 501, and the metal fitting 522 is disposed in a lower portion of the concave / convex surface 550, that is, a portion that does not protrude rearward. For this reason, it can prevent that the assembly | attachment of the board | substrate case unit 551 becomes difficult by the head part of the metal fitting 522 or the external thread 530. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, since the peripheral control board 510 is accommodated in a non-conductive board case unit 551 formed of synthetic resin or the like, the metal fitting 522 protrudes to the back side of the front opening / closing member 501. Even if arranged in such a state, contact between the metal fitting 522 and the peripheral control board 510 can be prevented, and an electrical failure can be suppressed.

[Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a that is attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b that is attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line region 500s in FIG. 37), the rotating member 420b and the fixing member. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and the short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f that is in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, both the lever mechanisms are designed to approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation axis 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 corresponds to a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a lock piece 421 is provided on the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 6) on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 among the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 6, the tip of the lock piece 421 engages with the receiving portion 508 protruding from the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state, the image display is performed. The body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the front opening / closing member 501 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation. That is, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the effect display device 590 is mounted below the front opening 516 (the opening 591a of the decorative member 591 in FIG. 6) where the symbols attached to the reels 301a to 301c face. (See FIG. 6), in the slot machine having such a configuration, if the gaming unit 50 is attached to the door-shaped front member 200 side, the weight on the door-shaped front member 200 side increases, and the outer main body 100 has a larger weight. It is necessary to make the hinge for pivotally supporting the door-shaped front member 200 strong, and the design load increases. Therefore, the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby reducing the design load and the inside of the game unit 50 (for example, wiring of the main control board 409, for example). Etc.) can be visually recognized to facilitate maintenance and prevent fraud.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the connector 700 of the embodiment is formed with a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and is slidable inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed in such a state that the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. . In this way, as shown in FIG. 40, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. ing. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  41, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is disposed inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is engaged with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. The rod 702 is provided with a knob 706 projecting on the side surface in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 can be unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a is in contact with the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 41, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 6, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part (not shown) that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging part 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. Is not provided). Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is open, and the smoothness will be impaired. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge fitting 420, which is one element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. There is.

[Front Opening / Closing Member-Lighting Device]
As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the decorative member 591 accommodated on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, a plurality of lighting devices 502a that emit light downward are arranged below the lighting device 502a. A reflecting member 502b that reflects light emitted from the lighting device 502a toward the player side is disposed. In particular, the reflecting member 502b has a white reflecting surface that is curved so that the lower side is closer to the decorative member 591 on the front surface, and the substantially entire region of the decorative member 591 is irradiated with light substantially evenly. Note that the decoration member 591 is made of a light-transmitting member, and the light reflected by the reflection member 502b is radiated to the outside (player side) through the decoration member 591. That is, the decorative member 591 can be surface-emitted by the lighting device 502a and the reflecting member 502b.

[Wiring means]
For example, the bet buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “main body” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. Side electrical component ") and the main control board 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as" case member side electrical component "as a general term for electrical components on the case member side). Connected. The slot machine 1 according to the embodiment displays the symbol variation display device 300 and an arbitrary image on the game unit 50 (the case member 400 and the front opening / closing member 501 that are detachably provided to the inside of the outer main body 100). The case-side electrical component including the image display body 500 is assembled. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main body is detachable from the outer main body 100. Reasonable wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the side electrical component and the case member side electrical component.

[Wiring means-Wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 9 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIG. 3, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400, and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. As shown in FIG. 9, the wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the game unit side wirings 423 (see FIG. 11) connected to the case member side electric parts. In addition, the mounting plate 120 screwed to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (embodiment) to be accommodated between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 Then, it is composed of two main and small connector boards (hereinafter also referred to as “connector connection terminal boards”), that is, a main relay board 122 and a peripheral relay board 123.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the main relay board 122, which is the larger connector board located on the left side in FIGS. 9 and 10, is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the control board 409 is provided. That is, by connecting the connector 425 to the connector 124, the operation power is supplied to the main control board 409, and the main control board 409 controls the main body side electrical components arranged outside the case member 400. A signal can be transmitted.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board (peripheral relay board) 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 9 and 10 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed playable state. Therefore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 10, it can move in the vertical direction and can also move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to a peripheral control board 510 described later. Furthermore, in the present invention, the game unit side wirings are divided into main control system wirings 424 connected to the game control board and peripheral control system wirings 426 connected to the peripheral control board (see FIG. 11). The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, it is mounted in a non-fixed playable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Therefore, it can be moved in the vertical direction as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. Can move. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with a connector 427 (see FIG. 11) at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main control board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used. That is, by connecting the connector 427 to the connector 125, from the peripheral control board 510 to the door decoration drive board 860 (described later), the L speaker 201a, and the R speaker 201b (described later) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Drive signals are sent and can be operated.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting at a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half portion. It has a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward and a main body side guide portion 453 described later.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 and is distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 side of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 1), and the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104 are connected. The direction is changed almost vertically in the vicinity of the corner, and many of them are connected to the main body side electrical components through wiring openings (not shown) provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, it remains as it is regardless of the wiring opening of the partition plate 105. Connected.

[Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 are connected to the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main control board 409 of the case member 400 and the peripheral control board 510. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 are connected to each other.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 at the substantially center and projecting on both sides of the holder main body 429, and the attachment. A well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through-hole 430 of the attachment piece 431 and a unit-side guide portion 452 to be described later are provided. As shown in FIG. An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of the installation with the game unit 50 alone. Meanwhile, the connectors 425 and 427 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that is directed from the inside of the case member 400 toward the wiring window 411 (see FIG. 7), and is almost mounted with the connector holder 428. It has a horizontal bench 433, bench side plates 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state.

  Then, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is fitted between the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434, thereby connecting the connector. The holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 425 hit the parts in the case member 400, and of course, the parts There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 4 (b) → FIG. 4 (a), in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is warped outward as described above. When the holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 comes into contact with the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector 124 of the wiring relay member 113. , 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in this state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member 400. Even if the main body 100 and the game unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

  From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to a back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to a component, a connector attached to a tip of the case side wiring, a connector holder attached to the connector, and the connector A temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the holder; and fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member. Then, the connector holder is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing member before the gaming unit is attached to the outer body, and the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the gaming unit is attached to the outer main body. The connector of the holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the slot machine 1 described above, the mounting of the gaming unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly connected to the gaming unit 50. A method of automatically connecting connectors by attaching and pushing the game unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the gaming unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasures are high. is there.

  The slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the gaming unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the game unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the gaming unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 and is separated from the gaming unit 50. Even when using low-cost general connectors that are used by soldering to the board, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and games. Further, since only the gaming unit 50 is a replacement target when changing the model, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not a replacement target, the burden on the game room for changing the model is also reduced.

[Combination of connectors 425 and 427 and connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of this example, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 serving as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can be combined. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

  From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment includes one or more connector groups in a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector. Is attached to one connector holder, and another connector group that is paired with the connector holder is mounted on the connector board, and the connector board is further divided into connectors, and one of them is fixed to the board support member and the other connector. The board is attached to the board support member so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to the component, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring, and the two or more connectors A connector holder that collectively supports the connector group, a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and each connector of the two or more connector groups Connected to another connector group using a board-fixed type connector that is fixed to a printed circuit board and attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed And connecting the connector connecting terminal board to the wiring relay member while fixing one of the connector connecting terminal boards to the wiring relay member. It is characterized in that it is attached in such a manner that it can be freely moved in a direction orthogonal to the direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment includes one or more connector groups in a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector. Is attached to the board support member via the connector board, and another connector group that is paired with the board support member is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder and the other The connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to the component, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring, and the two or more connectors A connector holder that collectively supports the connector group, a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and each connector of the two or more connector groups Connected to another connector group using a board-fixed type connector that is fixed to a printed circuit board and attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed A terminal board for fixing, and fixing one connector in the connector group to the connector holder, and attaching the other connector to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. It is characterized by that.

  In the above gaming machine (slot machine 1), if the connector holder is operated while aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, the relative position between the other connectors is slightly deviated due to manufacturing error or the like. Even if there is, the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the gaming unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the gaming unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the gaming unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the gaming unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, and therefore it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in this example, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for the coupling aim can be easily matched.

  Further, a chamfered portion (either a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer) is formed at the peripheral corner of the tip of the convex connector 425, 427 and / or the peripheral corner of the insertion port of the concave connectors 124, 125. In addition, the inductive action along the taper of the chamfered portion makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a having a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 469a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. A loose hole 469a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted to the ear piece 427b with a screw 469 with a washer. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the diameter difference between the free hole 469a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In this example, a mechanism for guiding the insertion direction of the connector holder 428 is provided in order to further facilitate the connecting operation between the connector 124 and the connector 425 and between the connector 125 and the connector 427. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 9, a resin cover body 121 is provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 so as to cover the connector substrate 122 and the connector substrate 123. As described above, the cover body 121 is formed with a main body side guide portion 453 that protrudes toward the connector holder 428 side. The main body side guide portion 453 is disposed below the opening 126, and has a projecting portion 462 that has a quadrangular prism-like appearance on its side, and a slit-like main body side through hole 461 that penetrates in the vertical direction at the center portion in the left-right direction. It consists of and. The main body side guide portion 453 may be formed and bonded separately from the cover body 121, but is integrally formed with the cover body 121 in this example.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 13, a unit side guide portion 452 is formed on the bottom surface of the connector holder 428 so as to face the main body side guide portion 453. The unit side guide portion 452 includes a hole forming member 464 having a hole 463 into which the protruding portion 462 of the main body side guide 453 can be inserted. That is, the connectors 124 and 125 on the outer main body 100 side (wiring relay member 113 side) are cooperated with the main body side guide portion 453 formed in the cover body 121 and the unit side guide portion 452 provided in the connector holder 428. The connection work between the connector 425 and 427 (hereinafter referred to as the unit-side connector 425) assembled to the connector holder 428 is further facilitated. That is, the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like is guided with respect to the main body side connector 124 and the like fixed to the wiring relay member 113. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 are opposed to each other, the distance m between the opening portion of the hole portion 463 and the protruding portion 462 in the hole portion forming member 464. Is shorter than the distance n between the unit-side connector 425 and the like and the body-side connector 124 and the like, and the tip of the protruding portion 462 is inserted into the hole portion 463 and relatively slides along the peripheral surface of the hole portion 463. In the middle of the operation, when the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 come into contact with each other, and the tip of the protruding portion 462 is inserted to the back side of the hole 463 as shown in FIG. Are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like. Therefore, it becomes possible to connect smoothly and easily, and workability | operativity can be improved significantly. Even when the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like are completely connected, the protruding portion 462 does not reach the innermost wall of the hole portion 463. For this reason, even if a manufacturing error occurs in the length of the protruding portion 462 or the depth of the hole portion 463, the unit-side connector 425 and the body-side connector 124 can be reliably connected. In addition, since the unit-side guide portion 452 is formed in the connector holder 428, the fitting of a plurality of unit-side connectors 425 and the like can be collectively guided by one unit-side guide portion 452.

  By the way, in the case of guiding the fitting direction of the unit-side connector 425 and the like by the protruding portion 462 formed in the cover body 121 and the hole portion 463 formed in the connector holder 428, at least the tip of the protruding portion 462 is at the body side It protrudes forward from the connecting portion between the connector 124 and the unit side connector 425. For this reason, in the case where the protruding portion 462 is disposed above the connector 124, the connecting portion between the connector 124 and the connector 425 is partially blocked by the protruding portion 462. For example, the connection between the connector 124 and the connector 425 There is a risk that a foreign object may not be noticed. Moreover, it may be difficult to visually recognize the connection state between the connectors. On the other hand, in this example, since the block-shaped hole forming member 464 for forming the hole 463 is disposed on the bottom surface of the connector holder 428, the connector 124 and the connector 425 are formed by the protruding portion 462 or the hole forming member 464. It is possible to prevent the connected portion from being shielded, and to easily check the connected state visually.

  By the way, in the case where the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected in a state where they can be separated from each other, the connector 124 and the connector 425 or the connector 125 and the connector 427 are separated from each other. There is a possibility that an unauthorized control means or an unauthorized part will be attached to the game, that is, a game based on an unauthorized signal may be performed. In order to solve this problem, after the unit side connector 425 or the like is connected to the main body side connector 124 or the like, the unit side connector 425 or the like and the main body side connector 124 or the like may be fixed in an inseparable state. However, according to this, it becomes extremely difficult to remove the gaming unit 50, and there is no advantage that the gaming unit 50 can be replaced.

  Therefore, in this example, after the gaming unit 50 is accommodated in the outer main body 100 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like, as shown in FIG. The unit side guide portion 452 and the main body side guide portion 453 are bundled so that the connected state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. In particular, the binding band 454 is formed of a trace generating member, and when the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 is released (that is, another illegal member is connected to the unit side connector 425 and the like). When it is possible to do so, a trace is left.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, at least one of the unit side guide portion 452 and the connector holder 428 is provided with a unit side through hole 460, and the main body side guide portion 453 has a unit side when connected. Since the main body side through hole 461 that can be superimposed on the side through hole 460 is provided, by binding the binding band 454 through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, On the other hand, the unit side guide portion 452 can be fixed, and the connected state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), the binding band 454 includes a band portion 455 provided with serrated row teeth on one side, and an insertion through which the band portion 455 can be inserted provided on one end side of the band portion 455. A head 456 having a hole, and a locking claw 457 that is formed inside an insertion hole in the head 456 and that can lock the serrated row teeth of the band portion 455 and cannot be released after locking. And a logo display portion 458 formed on the extension of the band portion 455 and engraved with a logo. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 17, the band portion 455 of the binding band 454 is passed through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, and then the band portion 455 is inserted through the head portion 456. When inserted into the hole, the sawtooth row teeth formed on one side of the band portion 455 are locked by the locking claws 457 formed inside the insertion hole, and the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side guide portion 452 are engaged. Are united.

  Then, as the band portion 455 is inserted deeper into the insertion hole, the annular portion (binding portion) is contracted and the tightening force is increased. In particular, the locking claw 457 is configured such that once the sawtooth row teeth are locked, the subsequent release operation cannot be performed, so that the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. And fraud can be prevented. Further, when the binding band 454 is cut, the unit side connector 425 and the like can be removed from the main body side connector 124 and the like, but in this case, there remains a trace that the binding band 454 has been cut. Thus, it is possible to grasp whether or not an illegal act has been performed. Note that when the old game unit is removed from the game store, it is only necessary to cut the binding band 454 with a scissors or the like, so that the burden on the operator at the time of replacement can be reduced.

  Note that the binding band 454 of this example is engraved with a specific logo on the logo display portion 458. Therefore, even if the binding band 454 is restored to its original state using another binding band after an illegal act is performed, Since the types of binding bands are different, it is possible to grasp that an illegal act has been performed. Further, since the binding band 454 is made of a fluorescent member, it can be made more conspicuous than other members disposed in the case member 400, and the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 can be connected to each other. It becomes possible to clearly recognize whether or not the state is released. Further, since the case member 400 is formed of a transparent member, the state of the binding band 454 can be visually recognized from the outside of the case member 400 even when the front surface of the case member 400 is closed by the image display body 500. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the unit side through-hole 460 communicates with the notch-shaped groove 460 a formed on the rear end side of the hole forming member 464, and the groove 460 a and is formed in the connector holder 428. Through hole 460b. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 14, when the main body side guide portion 453 having the main body side through hole 461 is inserted into the hole portion forming member 464, the through hole 460b and the groove portion 460a and the main body side through hole 461 are inserted. It is possible to insert the binding band 454 in the vertical direction and tighten the binding band 454 along the outer peripheral surface of the hole forming member 464. In particular, not only the connector holder 428 but also the rear end side of the hole forming member 464 is formed with a notch-shaped groove 460a through which the binding band 454 is passed. Even when it is formed on the connection part side), the insertion position of the binding band 454 can be brought closer to the front side (operator side), and workability can be improved. Even when the hole forming member 464 has a relatively large thickness, the groove portion 460a formed in the hole forming member 464 has a shape in which the rear end is opened, and thus the binding band 454 with respect to the hole forming member 464 is formed. Can be inserted easily.

  Further, since the horizontal width dimension of the groove portion 460a formed in the hole forming member 464 is substantially equal to the horizontal width of the binding band 454, movement of the binding band 454 inserted into the groove portion 460a, in particular, lateral movement is prevented. can do. That is, since the binding band 454 is positioned by the hole forming member 464, the binding band 454 can be stably bound at an appropriate position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, on the upper surface side of the connector holder 428, an entry guide portion 465 inclined downward toward the unit side through hole 460 (especially the through hole 460b) is formed, and the binding band 454 is attached. When doing so, the approach direction of the binding band 454 is guided from the front side of the connector holder 428 toward the through hole 460b. For this reason, even when the through-hole 460b is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the tip of the binding band 454 can reach the through-hole 460b relatively easily, and the workability can be further improved. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, a delivery guide portion 466 is formed on the bottom surface and the front surface of the hole forming member 464, and the tip of the binding band 454 after inserting the unit side through hole 460 is formed as a hole portion. Guided toward the front of member 464. For this reason, it is possible to send out naturally toward the front and arrange it in an annular shape so as to surround the hole forming member 464 without performing an operation such as drawing out the binding band 454 inserted through the through hole 460b. Become. Therefore, it is possible to perform the bundling work more easily. The delivery guide portion 466 includes a substantially arc-shaped guide surface 467 and a bank portion 468 formed along the guide surface 467. For this reason, the binding band 454 can be smoothly fed out along the substantially arc-shaped guide surface 467.

  The harness 424 (see FIG. 11) connected to the unit-side connector 425 and the like is wired substantially parallel to the direction in which the unit-side through hole 460 is drilled. Specifically, the harness 424 is drawn out upward, which is perpendicular to the mounting direction of the unit-side connector 425 and the like. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the binding band 454 inserted into the unit side through hole 460 and the harness 424 from crossing each other, and it is possible to prevent the binding work by the binding band 454 from becoming difficult due to the presence of the harness 424.

  By the way, even if the unit side guide portion 452 and the main body side guide portion 453 are held in alignment by the binding band 454, the unit side connector 425 and the like with respect to the connector holder 428 on which the unit side guide portion 452 is formed. Is detachably attached, the unit side connector 425 and the like can be detached from the main body side connector 124 and the like without cutting the binding band 454.

  On the other hand, according to this example, as shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of unit-side connectors 425 and the like are attached to the connector holder 428 by screws 469. These screws 469 are attached as shown in FIG. Since the connector holder 428 is screwed into the surface facing the main body side connector 124 and the like, the screw 469 cannot be loosened unless the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 are separated. Therefore, it is prevented that “the unit side connector 425 and the like are removed from the main body side connector 124 and the like while the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the outer main body 100, the cover body 121 formed with the main body side guide portion 453 covers the connector board 122 and the like. It cannot be removed from the outer body 100. Therefore, the crime prevention effect can be further enhanced. In particular, the cover body 121 is attached to the connector board 122 or the like using screws (not shown), but the screws are screwed through through holes 134a formed at positions facing the connector holder 428. Therefore, the screws cannot be loosened unless the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are separated. In other words, in a state where the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like, a tool such as a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the portion into which the screw is screwed. Therefore, it is prevented that “the cover body 121 is removed from the connector substrate 122 or the like while the fixed state of the unit side guide part 452 with respect to the main body side guide part 453 is maintained”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the shelf-like temporary fixing shelf 418 is formed in the case member 400 of the gaming unit 50 as described above. 434 limits the movable range of the connector holder 428. For this reason, when connecting the unit side connector 425 and the like to the main body side connector 124 and the like, first, the connector holder 428 is roughly positioned by the bench portion 433 and the bench side plate 434, and then the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side Positioning with high accuracy is performed by the guide portion 452. Therefore, even if the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side guide portion 452 are disposed at positions where it is difficult to visually recognize them, it is possible to easily match them, and thus smoothly guide the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like. It becomes possible to do.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game hall, but when the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail (not shown) of the game machine installation island are fixed with a fixing member such as a wood screw, The door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and a wood screw (not shown) is inserted through the skylight 443 from the inside of the case member 400 into the through-hole 132 of the outer main body 100, and further with a tool such as a screwdriver. The fixing member is tightened through the skylight portion 443, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail (not shown) vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail can be selected. In addition, when replacing the entire gaming machine, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent an adverse effect (so-called fool hole formation) in which the hole of the fixing member is opened at the same position of the upper rail.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 3, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used as a cooling fan (not shown) for the image display body 500. Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 (see FIG. 1) of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

  Subsequently, another example of the coupler will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. 45 is a perspective view showing the operating state of the connector 80, FIG. 46 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main part of the connector 80, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the connector 80, and FIG. 49 is a rear view as seen from the back side, and FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the connector 80 is disposed in a state where most of the coupler 80 is embedded in a groove-like housing portion 500 b formed on the back surface of the image display body 500. That is, it is provided in a state where it does not protrude so much from the back surface of the image display body 500. In addition, the connecting tool 80 has a rotating outer edge of the image display body 500 so that the case member 400 cannot be operated in a state where the case member 400 is mounted in the outer main body 100 and the opening of the case member 400 is closed by the image display body 500. It is provided in the part. For this reason, it is necessary to connect the connecting tool 80 to the stop shaft 703 with the image display body 500 opened, and thus connecting the connecting tool 80 without forgetting to release the lock piece 421, that is, a door-shaped front member. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the 200 and the image display body 500 cannot be opened.

  Similarly to the connector 700, the connector 80 protrudes from the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500, and a resin connection rod 800 whose tip side is rotatably connected to the stop shaft 703, and the connection rod 800, The image display body 500 includes a sliding guide member 801 that is slidably supported along the radial direction of the rotation locus. That is, by supporting the connecting rod 800 so as to be able to protrude and retract in the protruding direction, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation outer edge side of the image display body 500 as the door-shaped front member 200 rotates. Even if the distance to the change, the connection state can be maintained by sliding the connection rod 800.

  In the connecting tool 80 of this example, an extendable arm 820 is interposed between the image display body 500 and the connecting rod 800. The telescopic arm 820 is configured to bendable in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory, and when the telescopic arm 820 extends, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 49 (b), the connecting rod 800 extends in the protruding direction. On the other hand, when the telescopic arm 820 contracts, as shown in FIG. 45 (a) or FIG. 49 (a), the connecting rod 800 is immersed.

  Next, the configuration of the connecting rod 800, the sliding guide member 801, and the telescopic arm 820 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 47, the connecting rod 800 has a substantially rod-like shape as a whole, a circular shaft hole portion 800d is formed on the base portion 800a side, and a long hole whose longitudinal direction has a long diameter is formed on the distal end side. A shaft hole 800c having a shape is formed. The height of the upper surface is the same between the base portion 800a side and the distal end side, but the thickness in the height direction is about ½ from the base portion 800a side to the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. Yes. In other words, by forming a space below the base portion 800a, it is possible to make a part of the telescopic arm 820 slip, and as a result, when the telescopic arm 820 is bent, the telescopic arm 820 and the base portion 800a partially overlap. Even if it exists, the thickness in the height direction does not become too large. In particular, a semicircular cutout portion 800e is formed on the side surface of the base portion 800a (the lower surface in FIG. 49B), and a connecting portion formed on the distal end side of the second arm portion 820b described later. A part of can be accommodated.

  In addition, a protruding reinforcing member 800 b is formed on the distal end side of the connecting rod 800 and protrudes from the side surface of the connecting rod 800 in the circumferential direction of the rotation locus. When the door-shaped front member 200 rotates from the open position to the closed position, that is, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the protruding reinforcing member 800b is attached to the base member 215a on which the stop shaft 703 (see FIG. 41) is supported. It is formed at a position where it abuts and is pressed toward the center of rotation. For this reason, when closing the door-shaped front member 200, the load applied to the stop shaft 703 and the connection rod 800 can be dispersed compared to the case where the connection rod 800 is pressed only by the stop shaft 703, and the stop due to the concentration of the load is prevented. Breakage of the shaft 703 or the connecting rod 800 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the sliding guide member 801 is a member for guiding the connecting rod 800 in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory, and is formed of resin and has a substantially U-shaped cross section in which a surface facing the image display body 500 is opened. And a pair of flange portions 801b extending in the vertical direction from the rear surface edge portion on the front end side of the guide portion 801a. As shown in FIG. 45, the flange portion 801b is attached to the back surface of the image display body 500 in a state of protruding from the groove-like accommodation portion 500b, and an attachment screw is inserted through each central portion. Through-holes are formed.

  47 and 49, a rectangular opening 801c through which the telescopic arm 820 passes is formed in the side surface of the sliding guide member 801 along the longitudinal direction. Is formed with a semicircular cutout 801d that can accommodate the connecting portion of the telescopic arm 820 extending to the bottom surface. The notch 801d is formed at a position that coincides with the notch 800e formed in the connecting rod 800 in the vertical direction when the connecting rod 800 is in an immersive state, and the connecting portion is inserted in the overlapping state. It has come to be.

  The telescopic arm 820 includes a first arm portion 820a whose one end is pivotally supported with respect to a support shaft 830 (see FIG. 45) fixed to the back surface of the image display body 500, and both ends are connected to the distal end side of the first arm portion 820a. The second arm portion 820b is pivotally supported by the base portion 800a of the heel 800, and is configured to be bent into a “<” shape. More specifically, the first arm portion 820a includes a C-shaped support ring 820c on the base end side and is externally fitted to the support shaft 830 so as to be rotatable. Note that the position of the support shaft 830 is set at a position deviating from the sliding straight line of the connecting rod 800 (that is, the inside of the sliding guide member 801) to the rear side, and the connecting rod 800 protrudes most (see FIG. 49 (b)), the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod 800 and the longitudinal direction of the first arm portion 820a are substantially parallel. On the other hand, when the connecting rod 800 is immersed (see FIG. 49 (a)), the first arm The tip side of the portion 820a is in a state of being bitten into the connecting rod 800. Note that a connecting portion having substantially the same diameter as the support ring 820c is formed on the distal end side of the first arm portion 820a, and a shaft hole portion 820d is formed therein.

  The second arm portion 820b has a glasses-like shape in plan view, and connection portions having shaft hole portions 820e and 820f having the same diameter as the shaft hole portion 820d are formed on both ends thereof. The shaft hole portion 820d of the first arm portion 820a and the shaft hole portion 820e of the second arm portion 820b are rotatably connected to each other via the rotation shaft 821a, and connected to the shaft hole portion 820f of the second arm portion 820b. The shaft hole portion 800d of the flange 800 is connected to each other through a rotation shaft 821b so as to be rotatable. Note that the thickness of the second arm portion 820b in the height direction is thinner than that of the first arm portion 820a, so that the second arm portion 820b can sink into the space formed in the lower portion of the connecting rod 800.

  As described above, the telescopic arm 820 is configured to bend in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory. Therefore, when the telescopic arm 820 is folded, the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod 800 can be shortened. In particular, since the support shaft 830 is disposed at a position off the sliding straight line of the connecting rod 800, when the telescopic arm 820 is retracted, that is, when the telescopic arm 820 is folded, the connecting rod 800 is moved to the sliding guide member. It becomes possible to insert it to the innermost part of 801.

  Incidentally, the connecting rod 800 is supported so as to be swingable within a predetermined range in the same direction as the rotation locus of the image display body 500 around the rotation shaft 821b. As shown in FIG. 49, the inner width M of the sliding guide member 801 is set to be somewhat larger than the lateral width W of the connecting rod 800. For this reason, the connecting rod 800 can be swung within the rotation range limited by the swing restricting portion 805, and the protruding direction of the connecting rod 800 can be changed. Therefore, even if the relative position of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the rotation outer edge of the image display body 500 changes during the rotation of the door-shaped front member 200, it is possible to suppress an excessive force from being applied to the connecting rod 800, Warpage and breakage of the connecting rod 800 during rotation can be prevented.

  The swing restricting portion 805 is provided on the distal end side of the sliding guide member 801, and is configured such that the swingable range becomes narrower as the protruding length of the connecting rod 800 becomes shorter. That is, the distance between the rotating outer edge side of the image display body 500 and the rotating outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 tends to increase as the opening angle of the door-shaped front member 200 increases (in other words, the door shape). In contrast, in this example, the swingable range becomes narrower as the door-shaped front member 200 approaches the closed position, and therefore the opening degree of each member is reduced. Only swinging within an appropriate range is allowed. For this reason, the backlash of the image display body 500 during the rotation of the door-shaped front member 200 can be suppressed as much as possible, and can be rotated in a stable state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, a braking member 500c protruding outward is formed on the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Further, a protruding portion 800f protruding to the opposite side of the protruding reinforcing member 800b is formed on the side surface of the connecting rod 800, and when the image display body 500 is in the closed position as shown in FIG. That is, when the connecting rod 800 is in the immersive position, the position is set so that the braking member 500c and the protruding portion 800f abut each other. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the connecting rod 800 from swinging when the image display body 500 is closed. As a result, in the usable state where the image display body 500 is closed, the image display body 500 is brought into a fixed position. It can be held, and the generation of abnormal noise due to vibration during the game can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 46, an elastic cantilever type stopper 801 s is formed on the side surface of the base portion of the sliding guide member 801. The stopper 801s is for holding and holding the connecting rod 800 removed from the stop shaft 703 inside the sliding guide member 801. Prevent blindness.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, when changing the model, the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200 are used as they are and the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 are included. It becomes possible to exchange only the configuration of Therefore, the burden on the cost for changing the model can be reduced, and the replacement part can be reduced in size and weight, so that workability in transportation and installation is improved. In particular, since each unit is exchanged, handling becomes easy, and it is possible to exchange quickly even at a game store.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, a plurality of unit side connectors 425 and the like connected to the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 are arranged, and are detachably connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like. Is possible. In particular, the plurality of main body side connectors 124 and the like are gathered and arranged in one place in the outer main body 100, while the plurality of unit side connectors 425 and the like are collectively supported by one connector holder 428. By a single operation, a plurality of sets of connectors can be connected at the same time, and workability related to the connection can be improved.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like is guided with respect to the main body side connector 124 and the like fixed to the outer main body 100, smooth And it becomes possible to connect easily and workability | operativity can be improved significantly. In addition, since the unit side guide part 452 is formed in the connector holder 428, the fitting of the two unit side connectors 425 and 427 can be guided by one unit side guide part 452, and each unit side connector and Compared to the case where the guide portion is formed on the main body side connector, it can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is held by the binding band 454, the state of the binding band 454 can be visually recognized. A game store or the like can recognize that the unit-side connector 425 or the like has been removed from the connector 124 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the control from being changed by an unauthorized action, and to ensure the reliability of the main control board 409 and the like. In particular, since the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453 by binding the binding band 454 through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, the connected state can be achieved with an extremely simple configuration. While being able to hold | maintain, an unauthorized act can be easily grasped | ascertained according to the state of the binding band 454. Note that when the old game unit 50 is removed from the game store, it is only necessary to cut the binding band 454 with a scissors or the like, so that the burden on the operator at the time of replacement can be reduced.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, the notch-shaped groove portion 460a through which the binding band 454 passes is formed not only in the connector holder 428 but also on the rear end side of the hole forming member 464 that becomes the unit side guide portion 452. Therefore, even when the hole forming member 464 is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the insertion position of the binding band 454 can be brought closer to the operator side, and workability can be improved. Even when the hole forming member 464 has a relatively large thickness, the binding band 454 can be easily inserted into the hole forming member 464.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the entry guide portion 465 is formed on the upper surface of the connector holder 428, even when the unit side through hole 460 is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the binding is performed. The tip of the band 454 can reach the unit side through hole 460 relatively easily, and the workability can be further improved. Further, since the delivery guide portion 466 is formed in the hole forming member 464, it is sent out naturally toward the front without performing work such as drawing out the binding band 454 inserted through the unit side through hole 460, The hole forming member 464 can be annularly disposed so as to surround the hole forming member 464. Therefore, it is possible to perform the bundling work more easily.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, the screw 469 for fixing the unit side connector 425 or the like to the connector holder 428 is screwed into the surface of the connector holder 428 facing the main body side connector 124 or the like. Unauthorized operation of removing the unit side connector 425 and the like from the main body side connector 124 and the like while maintaining the fixed state of the unit side guide portion 452 with respect to the main body side guide portion 453 is prevented.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, since the main body side guide portion 453 is formed in the cover body 121, the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like can be achieved without providing a dedicated main body side fixing portion member separately. The overall structure can be further simplified. Further, since the cover body 121 covers the connector board 122 and the like, the connector board 122 cannot be removed from the outer main body 100 without removing the cover body 121. Therefore, the crime prevention effect can be further enhanced. Further, since the screw for fixing the cover body 121 is screwed in a position facing the connector holder 428, the cover body 121 is connected to the connector 124 while the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453. Is prevented from being removed.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, the front opening / closing member 501 is rotated in the same direction as the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 is moved sideways to the front opening / closing member 501. Since the connecting tool 80 for transmission is provided, not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400, particularly the state of the binding band 454, can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, the main control board 409 is assembled on the inner surface of the rear plate of the case member 400, and the wiring work space 408 is formed in front of the main control board 409. Wiring work to the attached main control board 409 is facilitated. In particular, since the wiring work space 408 and the unit side connector 425 and the like can be disposed adjacent to each other, the length of the harness connecting them is shortened, and the connecting work can be easily performed in the wiring work space 408. It becomes possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, since the effect display device 590 is provided on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, the display screen is formed relatively large so that a powerful image can be clearly seen. Is possible. Further, since the peripheral control board 510 for deriving a predetermined effect in the effect display device 590 is assembled on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the effect display device 590 and the peripheral control substrate 510 are integrally configured. As a result, handling becomes easy and complexity in the case member 400 can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the main body side connector and the unit side connector, two sets of connectors are connected. However, three or more sets of connectors may be connected.

  In the above embodiment, the protrusion 462 is formed in the main body side guide portion 453 and the hole portion 463 is formed in the unit side guide portion 452, but the relationship between the protrusion and the hole is reversed. May be. That is, a hole portion may be formed in the main body side guide portion, and a protruding portion inserted into the hole portion may be formed in the unit side guide portion. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although what formed only one set of the unit side guide part 452 and the main body side guide part 453 was shown, you may make it form two sets.

  In the above embodiment, the binding band 454 is used as the connection state holding means. However, when the connection state between the connectors is released, a trace remains, that is, the connection state is not broken or disconnected. Any member that cannot be released can be used. For example, it is possible to use a seal seal, and according to this, it becomes possible to maintain the connected state with a very simple configuration. However, when a seal seal is used, when the gaming unit 50 is replaced, a mark of the seal seal remains on the connector, making it difficult to reuse.

  In the above embodiment, the effect display device 590 is assembled to the front opening / closing member 501, that is, the effect display device 590 is incorporated as a part of the game unit 50 in a replaceable manner. The door-shaped front member 200 may be assembled. According to this, it becomes possible to handle the effect display device 590 as a common component. Even if the same effect display device 590 is employed, the effect displayed on the effect display device 590 (more specifically, the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 590, hereinafter referred to as “effect display device 590”). It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a different concept.

  In the coupling tools 700 and 80 of the above-described embodiment, the rod 702 and the coupling rod 800 are supported so as to be slidable in the radial direction of the rotation locus, and the rotation outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation of the front opening / closing member 501 are supported. Although what is made to appear and disappear according to the change in the distance from the moving outer edge is shown, the configuration is such that the rotation locus of the front opening / closing member 501 is made to coincide with the rotation locus having the rotation axis of the door-shaped front member 200 as the rotation center. In this case, the rotating outer edges of the door-shaped front member 200 and the front opening / closing member 501 may be connected by a connecting rod that does not slide.

[Replacing gaming units]
When changing the game content or changing the game model, the members and electrical parts disposed on the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200 are left and used as they are, and only the game unit 50 is used. It is removed from the main body side (the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200), and a new game unit 50 is housed and fixed inside the outer main body 100. Hereinafter, a specific work procedure when the game unit 50 is replaced will be described.

[Removing the gaming unit from the outer body 100]
When a key (key) is inserted into the locking device 215 on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200 shown in FIG. 2 and turned clockwise, the lock is released and the door-shaped front member 200 is released from the outer body 100. be able to. When the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled forward with respect to the outer main body 100, the door-shaped front member 200 rotates in a direction to open the interior with respect to the outer main body 100 around the rotation shaft 100a (see FIGS. 1 and 40). Move. At this time, in the image display body 500, the lower end portion of the retaining shaft 703 supported by the support piece 215b of the door-shaped front member 200 by the connector 700 (see FIGS. 40 and 41) is the fixed sheath of the image display body 500. By being connected to the rod 702 sliding inside the member 701, the image display body 500 rotates integrally with the door-shaped front member 200 around the hinge fitting 420 (see FIGS. 39 and 40). As a result, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is exposed.

  Next, a hand is put in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and the connector holder 428 (see FIG. 4) in the wiring work space 408 at the back is removed from the wiring relay member 113. As shown in FIG. 4, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinders 128 and 128 of the wiring relay member 113 by left and right button-type panel fasteners 432 and 432. When the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 are picked and pulled about 5 mm in the front direction, the connection between the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 and the support cylinders 128 and 128 is released. Then, by supporting the left and right attachment pieces 431 and 431 of the connector holder 428 by hand and pulling it forward, the connector connection between the connector 124 of the wiring relay member 113 and the connector 425 of the connector holder 428 is released, and the wiring When the connector connection between the connector 125 of the relay member 113 and the connector 427 of the connector holder 428 is released, both the connectors 425 and 427 can be removed. The connector holder 428 removed from the wiring relay member 113 is arranged on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418 (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the connector holder 428 does not move during transportation of the gaming unit.

  Next, the upper left and right stoppers 117 shown in FIGS. 1 and 26 are manually turned from the inside of the game unit and rotated to a position where they are not engaged with the locking holes 442 (see FIG. 7) of the case member 400. (Release of forward restriction of case member 400). Further, the lower stopper 117 is rotated to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG.

  Next, the retaining shaft 703 of the coupler 700 shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 41 is lifted upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the engagement between the retaining shaft 703 and the rod is released, and the image is kept. The display body 500 is rotated around the hinge bracket 420 in a direction to close the opening 401 of the case member 400. Then, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed with the image display body 500, and the lock piece 421 shown in FIG. In this state, the image display body 500 is locked in a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. As a result, the gaming unit 50 is only placed on the partition plate 105 (see FIG. 1) of the outer main body 100.

  Next, as described above, the case member 400 is pulled out by placing a finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10 between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500. Accordingly, the gaming unit 50 is pulled out together with the case member 400 with respect to the outer main body 100. The gaming unit 50 is removed from the outer main body 100 as described above. The procedure for storing and fixing the new gaming unit 50 inside the opening of the outer main body 100 is reversed.

[Electrical system deployed in slot machines]
Next, an electric system provided in the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the control configuration of the slot machine 1 includes a main control board 409 and a peripheral control board 510 arranged on the game unit 50 side, and various controls are shared. 50 shows a main control board 409 (see FIGS. 3 and 6) and a main body arranged on the game unit 50 (consisting of the symbol variation display device 300 + the case member 400 + the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. 5). 4 is a block diagram of a main relay board 122 provided on the side (wiring relay member 113 provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100). FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the main relay board 122 and the peripheral relay board 123 accommodated in the wiring relay member 113.

[Main relay board 122]
As shown in FIG. 53, the main relay board 122 includes a connector CN1 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN1 of the main relay board 122) for connection to the power supply board 112s and a connector 425 with a harness connected to the main control board 409 ( 11 is connected to a connector 124 (see FIG. 9, hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the main relay board 122) and a main door relay board 850 disposed on the back surface of a door-shaped front member 200 described later. External relay that relays to output game information of the slot machine 1 to the connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122) and a hall computer (not shown) installed in the game hall (hall) Connector CN4 (hereinafter referred to as connector CN4 of main relay board 122) connected to terminal board 131 (see FIG. 1), and medal release Connector CN5 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN5 of the main relay board 122) connected to the device 110 and a connector CN6 (hereinafter referred to as a medal auxiliary storage switch 111a disposed in the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals). And a connector CN7 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN7 of the main relay board 122) connected to the door opening detection switch 220. The main relay board 122 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) that simply allows various signals and power supply voltages to pass through. In the following description, since there is a connector for each board, the symbol “CN” may overlap between different boards.

  The power supply board 112s in FIG. 50 receives AC24V (two terminals) as input and generates a backup power supply for the memory of the main control board 409 and various DC operating power supplies (+ 30V power supply, + 12V power supply, + 24V power supply). 122 is supplied to the connector CN1. In addition, the code | symbol FG (one terminal) is connected to the earth | ground of amusement island equipment via the power harness which is not shown in figure. The housing FG terminal (one terminal) is connected to the metal part of the gaming machine main body as a ground.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN7 on the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the pins. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 54, the connector CN1 (to the power supply board 112s) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 12 pins. Pins 1 to 5 of the connector CN1 are all relay inputs for the ground GND. Pin 6 is a relay input for backup power supply (-) (0V), Pins 7 and 8 are both + 30V power supply relay inputs, and Pins 9 and 10 are both relays for + 12V power supply The 11th pin is a + 24V power supply relay input, and the 12th pin is a backup power supply (+) (+ 5V) relay input.

  The connector CN4 (external relay terminal board 131) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 10 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN4 is the relay output of external signal 5, pin 2 is the relay output of external signal 4, pin 3 is the relay output of external signal 3, pin 4 is the relay output of external signal 2, pin 5 Is a relay output of the external signal 1. Further, the 6th pin of the connector CN4 is a relay output of the medal payout signal, and the 7th pin is a relay output of the medal insertion signal. Further, the 8th to 10th pins of the connector CN4 are all relay outputs of the + 24V power source.

  The connector CN5 (to the medal discharge device 110) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 5 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN5 is a relay output of S + 5V (meaning sensor + 5V power supply, hereinafter referred to as sensor + 5V power supply), pin 2 is a relay input of game medal payout count switch signal, pin 3 Is the ground GND, the 4th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 1, and the 5th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 2.

  The connector CN6 (to the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN5 is a relay input of the signal of the overflow switch (medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the second pin is the ground GND. Further, the connector CN7 (to-door opening detection switch 220) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN7 is a relay input for the signal of the door opening detection switch 220, and the second pin is a ground GND.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the respective pins. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is composed of 30 pins and is connected to the main door relay board 850. As shown by a “door block” surrounded by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 50, a main door relay board 850, a medal selector 207 connected to the main door relay board 850, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a 1-bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 59).

  FIG. 59 is a rear view of the door-shaped front member 200 of the slot machine 1. The door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the front surface of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 1) of the slot machine so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape. That is, the door-shaped front member 200 can be rotated about the axis on the front side of the outer body 100 as a rotation axis. As shown in FIG. 59, a door substrate storage case 900 that houses a main door relay substrate (not shown) and a door decoration drive substrate (not shown) is provided in the approximate center of the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged. In addition, an L speaker (left speaker) 201a and an R speaker (right speaker) 201b are disposed on the left and right sides of the lower part of the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200.

  FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the door substrate storage case 900. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the door substrate storage case 900 has a door decoration drive substrate on the side of a rectangular door decoration drive substrate storage portion 901 that houses a door decoration drive substrate 860 (only the reference numeral is shown). The main door relay board storage portion 902 is integrally formed so as to have a smaller quadrangular shape and house the main door relay board 850 (only the reference numeral is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the main door relay board 850 includes a medal selector 207, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a 1 bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (a left reel stop button 211a, a middle A reel stop button 211b, a right reel stop button 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are connected.

  In FIG. 60, reference numeral 903 denotes a storage case cover that covers the entire top surface of the door substrate storage case 900. A connector with a harness connected to the medal selector 207 is attached to the outer surface of the storage case cover 903 of the main door relay substrate storage portion 902. The medal selector connection connector 852 (shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the medal selector connection connector 851 (configured with 10 pins as shown in FIG. 50) and the connector with harness connected to the stored medal adjustment button 209. Connected to the MAX bet button 206, a connector for a bet button 853 (configured with 4 pins as shown in FIG. 50), and a 1 bet button 205. 1-bet button connection connector 8 for connecting the harness-attached connector 4 (configured with 2 pins as shown in FIG. 50), start lever connection connector 855 (configured with 3 pins as shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the start lever 210, and reel stop Reel stop button connection connector 856 (consisting of 8 pins as shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the button 211 and the connector with harness connected to the batting release / error release switch 215c. Connector 857 (consisting of two pins as shown in FIG. 50) and a connector for connecting to the main body for sending each signal mainly from the main door relay board 850 to the main relay board 122 on the main body side The member 858 (composed of a 30-pin female die) is disposed in an exposed state.

  The connection between the main door relay board 850 and the main relay board 122 is a connector with a harness provided at one end with a connector member corresponding to the main body connection board member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850 (a connection well known in the art). And the connector CN3 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 50) of the main relay board 122 is connected to one end of the connector with the harness to the connector connecting member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850. 53), the other end of the connector 910 with harness (see FIG. 9) is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the + 24V power source, and the second pin is the relay output of the drive signal to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. The pin is the ground GND. Pin 4 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the medal passage sensor of the medal selector 207, pin 5 is the relay input of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 1) signal of the medal selector 207, and pin 6 is the medal selector. The relay input of the signal 207 of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 2), the seventh pin is the relay input of the signal of the medal insertion lever detection switch of the medal selector 207, and the eighth pin is the ground GND.

  The ninth pin is a relay input of a switch signal of the stored medal settlement button 209 (stored medal settlement switch), and the tenth pin is a ground GND. The 11th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 12th pin is the relay input of the switch signal of the MAX bet button 206 (stored medal insertion switch 2), and the 13th pin is the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. The 14th pin is the ground GND. The 15th pin is a relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 16th pin is a relay input of the switch signal of the 1-bet button 205 (stored medal insertion switch 1), and the 17th pin is a ground GND. Pin 18 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the sensor of the lever sensor of the start lever 210 (rotary rotation start device), the 19th pin is the ground GND, and the 20th pin is the start lever 210 (rotor rotation start device). ) Lever sensor signal relay input.

  The 21st pin is a relay input of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first cylinder, and the 22nd pin is a relay input of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second cylinder. The pin is a relay input of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third cylinder, and the 24th pin is the ground GND. Pin 25 is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, pin 26 is the relay output of the stop button LED1 lighting signal, pin 27 is the relay output of the stop button LED2 lighting signal, and pin 28 is It is a relay output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 29th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, and the 30th pin is the relay input of the signal of the reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c).

[Connector connection between main relay board 122 and main control board 409]
As shown in FIG. 50, the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is connected to the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 (connected via the connection between the connector 124 of FIG. 53 and the connector 425 with the harness 424 of FIG. ) The connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 and the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are composed of 64 pins.

  56 is a diagram showing the number of pins of connector CN2 of main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by each pin, and FIG. 57 is the number of pins of connector CN1 of main control board 409 and signals transmitted by each pin. FIG. Note that the pin numbers of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 in FIG. 56 and the pin numbers of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 in FIG. 57 correspond to each other.

  The first pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 5, and the first pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 5. The second pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 4, and the second pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 4. The third pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 3, and the third pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 3. The 4th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 2, and the 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 2. The 5th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 1, and the 5th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 1.

  The 6th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal payout signal output, and the 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal payout signal. The 7th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal insertion signal output, and the 7th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal insertion signal. The eighth pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the eighth pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 9th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a game medal payout count switch signal, and the 9th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a game medal payout / payout count switch signal. The 10th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 10th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND.

  The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1. Relay input. The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2. Relay input.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 15th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of an overflow switch signal (switch signal of the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the 16th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the overflow switch signal. is there. The 17th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a door open detection switch signal, and the 17th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the door open detection switch signal. Pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all ground GND, and pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are also ground GND.

  The 24th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a drive signal output to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207, and the 24th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is driven to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. This is a signal relay input. The 25th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 25th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 26th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 26th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 27th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207, and the 27th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207. Relay output. The 28th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a stored medal settlement switch signal (stored medal settlement button 209), and the 28th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a stored medal settlement switch signal. is there.

  The 29th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal (1 bet button 205), and the 29th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal. It is. Pin 30 of connector CN1 of main control board 409 is an input of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal (MAX bet button 206), and pin 30 of connector CN2 of main relay board 122 is a relay output of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal. It is. The 31st pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the lever sensor signal of the start lever 210 (rotating cylinder rotation starting device), and the 31st pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the start lever 210 (rotating cylinder rotation). It is a relay output of the lever sensor signal of the starting device.

  The 32nd pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of a reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c), and the 32nd pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is a reset switch (stop release / stop). This is a relay output of the signal of the error release switch 215c). The 33rd pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first cylinder, and the 33rd pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 corresponds to the first cylinder. It is a relay output of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a. The 34th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second cylinder, and the 34th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 corresponds to the second cylinder. This is a relay output of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b. The 35th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third cylinder, and the 35th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 corresponds to the third cylinder. This is a relay output of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c.

  The 36th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1, and the 36th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1. The 37th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2, and the 37th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2. The 38th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3, and the 38th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 39th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED, and the 39th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. .

  The 40th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the input of the backup power supply (-) (0V), and the 40th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the backup power supply (-) (0V). . The 41st pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply), and the 41st pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply). The 42nd pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V), and the 42nd pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V). .

  The 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. In addition, the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all + 12V power input, and the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all + 12V power relay outputs. It is.

  The 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. Also, the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all inputs of + 30V power, and the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all outputs of + 30V power. It is.

[Main control board]
FIG. 51 is a block diagram of the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 provided in the gaming unit 50. As shown in FIG. 50, the main control board 409 is connected to the main relay board 122 described above, and is connected to a gaming state display board 450 by a connector constituted by 12 pins, and a connector constituted by 24 pins. The reel main relay board 315 (see FIG. 23) is connected through the connector, and the function separation relay terminal plate 441 is connected by two connectors each having eight pins. Although not shown, the gaming state display board 450 is provided with a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet lamp, a bonus flag notification lamp, and the like. A reel motor relay board (reference numeral 326 in FIG. 25) corresponding to the left reel motor 321a is connected to the reel main relay board 315 via a connector composed of 9 pins, and the reel motor relay corresponding to the middle reel motor 321b. The board is connected via a connector consisting of 9 pins, and the reel motor relay board corresponding to the right reel motor 321c is connected via a connector consisting of 9 pins.

  Although not shown, the main control board 409 includes a main control MPU as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the left reel motor 321a and the middle reel motor 321b described above. And a drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the right reel motor 321c, a setting key (keyhole) for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1, a setting switch / error canceling, a hitting presence / absence switch, a settlement presence / absence switch Etc. are provided. The main control MPU has a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU includes the 1-bet button 205, the MAX bet button 206, the stored medal settlement button 209, the start lever 210, the reel stop button 211 (the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c. ), Medal selector 207 (lockout solenoid, passage sensor, lever sensor), door opening detection switch 220, game medal payout count switch of the medal releasing device 110, and detection from the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a of the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals. Signals are input via the main control I / O port, and based on these detection signals, a lockout solenoid, a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet Lamp with bonus flag A drive signal to the drive means of the known lamp and medal discharge unit 110 via the main control I / O port, and outputs.

  The main control MPU includes a main control I / O port, a reel main relay board 315, a left reel motor 321a that rotates the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c via the reel motor relay boards, and a middle reel. A left reel position sensor (reference numeral 325 in FIG. 25) that outputs drive signals to the motor 321b and the right reel motor 321c, and detects the original positions of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, and a middle reel position sensor In addition, a detection signal from the right reel position sensor is input.

  The main control MPU receives a signal from the setting switch / error release, stoppage presence / absence switch, settlement presence / absence switch, stoppage release / error release switch 215c via the main control I / O port, a medal payout signal, A medal insertion signal, a game status, and the like are output to the external relay terminal board 131.

"Setting switch / error reset"
The role of the setting switch / error cancellation changes depending on the setting key status. When the setting key is OFF (playable state), it functions as an error release switch. On the other hand, when the setting key is ON (setting change state), it functions as a setting switch.

[Setting key and setting switch / error reset]
Next, a procedure for changing the setting of the slot machine 1 will be described. First, the slot machine 1 is turned off, and the setting key switch is operated in this state. Specifically, a predetermined key is inserted into the setting key switch, and the key is rotated 90 degrees to the right. Next, the slot machine 1 is turned on with the key inserted in the setting key switch. The power is turned on by operating the power switch of the power supply unit. When the power is turned on, the current setting of the slot machine 1 is displayed on the credit display unit (for example, in the case of setting 1, “1” is displayed on the credit display unit). Next, the setting switch is operated. When the setting switch is operated, a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value displayed on the credit display unit is displayed. However, when the displayed numerical value is 6, the displayed value is returned to 1 without being added. When the setting switch is operated in this way and a desired setting value is displayed on the credit display unit, the start lever 210 is operated. By operating the start lever 210, the setting is confirmed. Turn the key 90 degrees to the left, and remove the key inserted in the setting key switch. When the power is turned on next time, the gaming machine operates with the set value set previously.

[Stopper switch]
First, “stopping” is a state in which a medal is not accepted after the bonus game is over. The stop / non-stop switch is a switch for determining whether to “stop” after the bonus game ends or to allow the game to be continued.

[Checkout switch]
“Checkout” means that credits are settled after the bonus game is completed, that is, medals for the credits are paid out. The settlement / non-payment switch is a switch for determining whether or not to “settlement” after the bonus game ends or “settlement”.

  The external relay terminal board 131 (see FIG. 50) is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer grasps the number of medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by the medal insertion signal, grasps the number of medals paid out by the slot machine 1 by the medal payout signal, and the gaming state of the slot machine 1 by the game status Count management is done by grasping.

  In FIG. 51, a function separation relay terminal plate 441 is connected to the main control board 409 by two connectors each having eight pins. In addition, a peripheral control board 510 (to be described later) is connected to the function separation relay terminal board 441 by two connectors each having eight pins. A connector composed of 8 pins without arrows is for power supply relay, and ground GND is composed of 4 pins, + 12V power supply is composed of 2 pins, and + 30V power supply is composed of 2 pins. Further, a connector composed of 8 pins indicated by arrows, such as main control board 409 → function separating relay terminal board 441 → peripheral control board 510, is for transmitting various commands related to games, and parallel data (command) D0. ˜D3, 4 pins, SEL (select signal) is 1 pin, WR (write signal) is 1 pin, power failure warning signal is 1 pin, and ground GND is 1 pin. The main control MPU transmits various commands related to games to a peripheral control board 510 described later via the main control I / O and function separation relay terminal board 441.

[Peripheral control board 510]
Although not shown, the peripheral control board 510 is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound, music that is referred to by the sound source IC, and A sound ROM in which sound information such as sound effects is stored is provided. The peripheral control MPU incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal control board provided with a VDP or the like for controlling the display of the image display body 500 on the peripheral control board 510 is directly connected between the connectors (connected by a board-to-board connector). A liquid crystal data ROM substrate having an image ROM for storing various images to be displayed on the liquid crystal module (effect display device) 590 and a liquid crystal output substrate having a driver for the liquid crystal module (effect display device) 590 are connected to the control board. Are connected directly (each connected by a board-to-board connector).

  The peripheral control board 510 is connected to the above-described function separation relay terminal board 441 by a connector composed of two 8 pins, and a panel decoration relay board 594 is connected to the peripheral control board 510 by a connector composed of 24 pins. It is connected to a later-described peripheral relay substrate 123 disposed on the main body side by a connector connection composed of 22 pins.

  The above-mentioned liquid crystal control board connected to the peripheral control board 510 by the board-to-board connector is connected to the liquid crystal module 590 (which constitutes the effect display device in the embodiment) by a connector constituted by 30 pins, and is constituted by 3 pins. The liquid crystal inverter board 592 is connected by the connector to be connected, and the fan motor 593 of the image display body 500 is connected by the connector having two pins. Further, the other end of the ground wire 527 (see FIG. 20) connected to the metal fitting 522 that contacts the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the liquid crystal module 590 is connected to the liquid crystal control board by a connector constituted by one pin. It is in a state of being electrically grounded (connected to the ground GND). Further, the liquid crystal inverter board 592 is connected to the liquid crystal module 590 by four connectors each having two pins, and the liquid crystal inverter board 592 generates a backlight operating voltage of about + 200V by using a + 30V power supply as an input. To the liquid crystal module 590.

  The panel decoration relay board 594 is connected to an upper panel illumination LED board 595 by a connector constituted by 2 pins, and a backlight relay board 318 (see FIG. 23) is connected by a connector constituted by 5 pins. The backlight relay board 318 is provided with a backlight board (backlight 322a in FIG. 25) corresponding to the left reel 301a (first cylinder) via a connector with a harness that is composed of two pins. Arc-shaped substrate) is connected. Similarly, a backlight board corresponding to the middle reel 301b (second drum) is connected to the backlight relay board 318 via a connector with a harness composed of two pins, and the right reel 301c (third drum). ) Is connected via a connector with a harness composed of 2 pins.

[Connector connection between peripheral control board 510 and peripheral relay board 123]
52 is a block diagram of the peripheral control board 510 provided on the gaming unit 50 side and the peripheral relay board 123 provided on the main body side (the wiring relay member 113 provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100). The peripheral control board 510 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected by a connector connection composed of 22 pins. Further, the peripheral relay board 123 is shown in FIG.

[Peripheral relay board 123]
As shown in FIG. 53, the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to a connector 427 with a harness 427 (see FIG. 11) connected to the peripheral control board 510 (see FIGS. 9 and 53; hereinafter, the peripheral relay board 123). Connector CN1), a connector CN2 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123) connected to a door decoration drive board 860 disposed on the back surface of a door-shaped front member 200, which will be described later, and a bass speaker (FIG. 1). The connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as the connector of the peripheral relay board 123) connected to the speaker disposed on the back plate 104 at the rear position of the medal releasing device 110 disposed in the lower part of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 30). CN3). The peripheral relay board 123 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) for simply passing various signals and power supply voltages.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 (connected via the connection of the connector 125 of FIG. 53 and the connector 427 with the harness 426 of FIG. ) The connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are composed of 22 pins.

  58 shows the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 and the signal transmitted by each pin, the number of pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the signal transmitted by each pin, and the connector of the peripheral relay board 123. It is a figure which shows CN2 and the number of pins of connector CN3, and the signal transmitted by each pin.

  The first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the first pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W2. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W2 of bass speaker 221). The second pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-W2 (a positive output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W2. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

  The third pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-W1 (a negative output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the third pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W1. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221). The fourth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the fourth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W1. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-L (the negative output of the L speaker 201a), and the fifth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-L. (This is a negative relay input of the L speaker 201a). Pin 6 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-L (plus output of L speaker 201a), and pin 6 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-L (L This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201a).

  The 7th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-R (the negative output of the R speaker 201b), and the 7th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-R. (It is a minus relay input of the R speaker 201b). The eighth pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-R (the positive output of the R speaker 201b), and the eighth pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-R (R This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201b).

  The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are the ground GND, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are outputs of + 12V power, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are relay inputs of + 12V power.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are the ground GND, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an output of S-LATCH1 (a latch signal used when outputting lighting data described later), and the 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-LATCH1 (described later). Is a relay input). The 16th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an S-MODE output (mode signal output), and the 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay input (mode signal). Relay input). The 17th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an S-CLK output (clock signal output), and the 17th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay input (clock). Signal relay input). The 18th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is S-DATA1 (output of serial lighting data), and the 18th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of S-DATA1 (serial Is the relay input of the lighting data.)

  Pin 19 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is SEL1 (output of select signal 1), and pin 18 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL1 (relay input of select signal 1) Is). Pin 20 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is SEL0 (output of select signal 0), and pin 20 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL0 (relay input of select signal 0) Is).

  The 21st pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an input of S-LATCH2 (a latch signal used when inputting pressure data (serial) described later), and the 21st pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S- It is a relay output of LATCH2 (a relay output of a latch signal used for the relay output of pressure data (serial) described later). The 22nd pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 is S-DATA2 (serial pressure data input), and the 22nd pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of the S-DATA2 (serial pressure data input). Relay output).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 22 pins and is connected to the door decoration drive board 860. 52, as indicated by “door block” surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line, the door decoration drive board 860, the top decoration board 871, the pressure determination board 878, the upper left decoration board 872, the lower left decoration board 873, and the upper right decoration board 874. The lower panel lighting 877 connected to the lower right decorative board 875, the lower panel lighting lighting board 876, the L speaker (left speaker) 201a, the R speaker (right speaker) 201b, and the lower panel lighting lighting board 876 is a door-shaped front surface. The member 200 is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the door decoration driving board 860 includes a top decoration board 871, a pressure determination board 878, an upper left decoration board 872, a lower left decoration board 873, an upper right decoration board 874, a lower right decoration board 875, and a lower panel illumination lighting board. 876, an L speaker 201a, and an R speaker 201b are connected. In this way, the door decoration drive board 860 that drives the lighting of the door-side decorative light emitting body (described later) disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 is separated from the peripheral control board 510 and is used as the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the top decorative board connection connector 861 for connecting the harness-attached connector connected to the top decorative board 871 to the outer surface of the storage case cover 903 of the door decorative drive board storage portion 901 of the door board storage case 900. (Configured with 12 pins as shown in FIG. 52), pressure judgment board connection connector 869 (configured with 5 pins as shown in FIG. 52) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the pressure judgment board 878, and upper left Upper left decorative board connection connector 862 (consisting of 13 pins as shown in FIG. 52) for connecting the connector with harness connected to decorative board 872 and lower left decoration for connecting the connector with harness connected to lower left decorative board 873. A board connection connector 863 (consisting of 6 pins as shown in FIG. 52) and a H connected to the upper right decorative board 874. The connector for connecting the right upper decorative board 864 for connecting the connector with the harness connected to the lower right decorative board 875 and the connector for connecting the right upper decorative board 864 (configured with 13 pins as shown in FIG. 52). (Consisting of 6 pins as shown in FIG. 52) and a lower panel illumination lighting board connection connector 866 for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the lower panel lighting lighting board 876 (consisting of 2 pins as shown in FIG. 52) ), An L speaker connection connector 867 for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the L speaker 201a (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 52), and an R for connecting the connector with a harness connected to the R speaker 201b. The speaker connection connector 868 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 52) and the door decoration drive board 860 to the periphery on the main body side A relay board 123 to the signal-to-body connector member sends a 859 (22-pin female) is disposed in an exposed state.

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are composed of 22 pins.

  The door decoration drive board 860 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected to a connector with a harness provided at one end with a connector member corresponding to the body connection connector member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860 (a well-known connection conventionally). One end of the connector with the harness is connected to the main body connecting connector member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860, and the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 (see FIG. 53) is used. ) To the other end of the connector 920 with harness (see FIG. 9).

  58, only the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is shown, and the CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 is not shown. The first pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL0 (the relay output of the select signal 0), and the first pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL0 (the input of the select signal 0) Is). The second pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL1 (the relay output of the select signal 1), and the second pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL1 (the input of the select signal 1) Is).

  The third pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay output of S-DATA1 (a relay output of serial lighting data), and the third pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an input of S-DATA1 ( Serial lighting data input). The 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay output (clock signal relay output), and the 4th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-CLK input (clock signal). Input).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay output (mode signal relay output), and the fifth pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-MODE input (mode signal). Input). The 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of S-LATCH1 (the relay output of the latch signal), and the 6th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of S-LATCH1 (the latch signal) Input).

  The 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND. The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are relay outputs of + 12V power, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are inputs of + 12V power. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-R relay outputs (plus relay output of the R speaker 201b), and the 13th pins and 14 of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-R (a positive input of the R speaker 201b). The 15th and 16th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-R relay outputs (the negative relay output of the R speaker 201b), and the 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 and The 16th pin is an input of -SPK-R (a negative input of the R speaker 201b).

  The 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-L relay outputs (plus relay output of the L speaker 201a), and the 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-L (a positive input of the L speaker 201a). The 19th and 20th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-L relay outputs (the negative relay output of the L speaker 201a), the 19th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860, and The 20th pin is an input of -SPK-L (a negative input of the L speaker 201a).

  The 21st pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an input of S-LATCH2 (a latch signal used when inputting pressure data (serial)), and the 21st pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 is S-LATCH2. Relay output (relay output of a latch signal used for relay output of pressure data (serial)). Pin 22 of connector CN2 of peripheral relay board 123 is S-DATA2 (input of serial pressure data), and pin 22 of connector CN1 of door decoration drive board 860 is a relay output of S-DATA2 (serial pressure data). Relay output).

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and bass speaker 221]
As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the bass speaker 221. The connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 4 pins. As shown in FIG. 58, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN3 is -SPK- W1 (a minus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), the third pin of the connector CN3 is + SPK-W2 (a plus output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the connector CN3 The fourth pin is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

[Arrangement of each decorative board of door-shaped front member 200]
The arrangement positions of the above-described top decorative substrate 871, upper left decorative substrate 872, lower left decorative substrate 873, upper right decorative substrate 874, lower right decorative substrate 875, and lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 are shown in FIG. The top decorative substrate 871 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the upper side of the transparent plate 214a disposed in the upper half of the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200 and facing in the left-right direction. The upper left decorative substrate 872 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the left side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower left decorative board 873 is located on the left side of the design board 230 (a member on which a character or the like symbolizing a game model is printed on a transparent resin board) arranged below the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It is fitted into the interior of a substantially triangular decorative panel. The upper right decorative substrate 874 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the right side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower right decorative board 875 is fitted inside a substantially triangular decorative panel located on the right side of the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 and the lower panel illumination 877 are disposed behind the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 is composed of an inverter, and the lower panel illumination 877 is composed of a cold cathode tube, and illuminates the design plate 230 from behind.

[Control by peripheral control board 510]
The sub-control block shown in FIG. 51 is composed of a portion divided by a dotted line in FIG. 51, a door block portion connected to the peripheral relay board 123 shown in FIG. 52, and a bass speaker 221. Yes. When the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510 in FIG. 52 receives various commands from the main control board 409, based on the various commands, the above-mentioned upper panel illumination LED board 595 and the backlight board (the first cylinder to the first cylinder). The left illuminator 217 </ b> A configured to output a lighting signal for illuminating the light emitting diodes of the three-time cylinder), or composed of the illuminant disposed on the upper left decorative substrate 872 and the illuminant disposed on the lower left decorative substrate 873. (To be described later), a gradation lighting signal (lighting) for gradation-lighting a right light emitter 217B (to be described later) composed of a light emitter disposed on the upper right decorative substrate 874 and a light emitter disposed on the lower right decorative substrate 875 One aspect of the lighting control data to be controlled) is output via the door decoration drive board 860 provided separately from the peripheral control board 510 disposed on the back face of the door-shaped front member 200, or the above-described It flops after being disposed on the decorative substrate 871 emitters 217C blinking signal for flashing (see below) (an aspect of the lighting control data for lighting control), and outputs via the door decorative driving substrate 860.

  The blinking signals to the left illuminator 217A and the right illuminator 217B and the gradation lighting signal to the upper illuminator 217C are output in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Door decoration based on serial data S-DATA1 (corresponding to lighting control data) and mode signal S-MODE, latch signal S-LATCH1 and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output port The drive substrate 860 outputs to the left light emitter 217A, the right light emitter 217B, and the upper light emitter 217C.

  The VDP of the liquid crystal control board connected to the peripheral control board 510 by the board-to-board connector reads out the image from the image ROM based on the control signal output from the peripheral control MPU and controls the display of the liquid crystal module 590. The liquid crystal module 590 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) and is lit by a liquid crystal inverter substrate 592.

  The sound source IC of the peripheral control board 510 reads the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control signal output from the peripheral control MPU, and the bass speaker 221 connected via the peripheral relay board 123 and the door decoration drive board 860. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the L speaker 201a and the R speaker 201b of the door-type front member 200.

[Door decoration drive board 860]
Next, the door decoration drive substrate 860 will be described. FIG. 61 shows a partial configuration of the door decoration drive board as a simple circuit diagram. As shown in FIG. 61, the door decoration drive board 860 includes a select circuit 860a, a switch circuit 860b, and a drive circuit 860c. First, various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860 will be described. Subsequently, the select circuit 860a, the switch circuit 860b, and the drive circuit 860c will be described. In FIG. 61, illustration of DC +5 volts (V) that is a control voltage supplied to the select circuit 860a and the like and DC + 12V that is a drive voltage supplied to the left light emitter 217A and the like is omitted.

[Various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 61, the door decoration drive board 860 is a peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510.
Serial data S-DATA1 is input from the (serial input / output port) in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK. In this embodiment, the clock signal S-CLK is set so that information of 250 kb (kilobits) can be output per second (s).

  The serial data S-DATA1 includes gradation lighting data for lighting the left illuminant 217A and the right illuminant 217B and gradation data for blinking the upper illuminant 217C, which are different in data format. The gradation lighting data is composed of gradation data and lighting data. Note that a plurality of these blinking data and gradation lighting data are separately stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 510 as a table, and the peripheral control MPU refers to those tables as needed to store one data. It is created as serial data S-DATA1 and output to the door decoration drive board 860.

  In addition to the clock signal S-CLK and serial data S-DATA1, the door decoration drive board 860 includes select signals SEL0 and SEL1, a mode signal S-MODE and a latch signal S-LATCH1 from the peripheral control MPU (parallel input / output port). Is entered. The select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are signals for transmitting to the switch circuit 860b whether the serial data S-DATA1 output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) is blinking data or gradation lighting data. The signal S-MODE is a signal that tells the driving circuit 860c whether the gradation lighting data is gradation data or lighting data, and the latch signal S-LATCH1 is the serial data S-DATA1 captured by the driving circuit 860c. Based on the above, the fact that the output of the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b, or the blink signal is started to be output to the upper light emitter 217C. Is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b.

  As for the wiring between the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860, one end of a connector with a harness having connectors for connection (22 pins) at both ends is connected to the connector CN3 (22 pins) of the peripheral control board 510. As shown in FIG. 11, the other end 427 of the connector with the harness (426) is attached to the connector holder 428 (the above configuration is the game unit side), and the peripheral relay board 123 housed in the wiring relay member 113. Connector 125 (CN1, 22 pins in FIGS. 52 and 53) (outside main body 100 side). Then, as shown in FIG. 9, one end of a connector 920 with a harness having connectors (22 pins) at both ends is connected to the connector CN2 (22 pins) of the peripheral relay board 123. The end is extended to the door-shaped front member 200 and connected to the connector CN1 (22 pin) of the door decoration drive board 860 (see reference numeral 859 in FIG. 60, FIG. 52). Through these harnesses, the clock signal S-CLK, serial data S-DATA1, select signals SEL0, SEL1, mode signal S-MODE, and latch signal S-LATCH1 from the peripheral control MPU are transmitted to the door decoration drive board 860. It has become.

[Select circuit 860a]
As shown in FIG. 61, the select circuit 860a includes inverters IC1A and IC1B (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC14), and logical products IC2A and IC3A (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC08). Configured.

  Each of the inverters IC1A and IC1B includes eight inverting circuits, and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are input to two of them (IC1A and IC1B), respectively. The logical products IC2A and IC3A have four logical product circuits (the same applies to IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D described later). The select signal SEL0 input to the input terminal 1 of the inverter IC1A inverts the input logic and is output from the output terminal 2 as the inverted select signal SEL0 'and input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC2A. Since the select signal SEL1 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC2A and the logical product IC2A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

  The select signal SEL1 input to the input terminal 3 of the inverter IC1B inverts the input logic, is output from the output terminal 4 as the inverted select signal SEL1 ′, and is input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC3A. Since the select signal SEL0 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC3A, and the logical product IC3A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

[Switch circuit 860b]
As shown in FIG. 61, the switch circuit 860b to which the calculation results by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input includes logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D. Serial data S-DATA1 is input to the input terminals 4 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 5 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B. Since the logical products IC2B and IC3B are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 4 and 5 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 6 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), serial Data S-DATA1 is switched between output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC3B to the drive circuit 860c.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 become the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The serial data S-DATA1 is not output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c and the output terminal of the logical product IC3B depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (because the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 6 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. This prevents the serial data S-DATA1 affected by noise from being output to the drive circuit 860c (preventing unintended serial data S-DATA1 from being output to the drive circuit 860c). Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA1.

  The clock signal S-CLK is input to the input terminals 9 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 10 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C. Since the logical products IC2C and IC3C are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 9 and 10 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 8 to the drive circuit 800c.

  As described above, according to the calculation result by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the clock Whether the signal S-CLK is output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC3C to the drive circuit 860c is switched.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The clock signal S-CLK is not output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 800c and output terminal of the logical product IC3C depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 8 is not output to the drive circuit 800c. As a result, the clock signal S-CLK affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the clock signal S-CLK.

  The latch signal S-LATCH1 is input to the input terminals 12 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 13 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D. Since the logical products IC2D and IC3D are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 12 and 13 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 11 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation result of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the latch The signal S-LATCH1 is switched between output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 800c or output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC3D to the drive circuit 800c.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 800a, The latch signal S-LATCH1 is not output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3D depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 11 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. As a result, the latch signal S-LATCH1 affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the latch signal S-LATCH1.

[Drive circuit 860c]
As shown in FIG. 61, the drive circuit 860c to which the operation results of the logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D of the switch circuit 860b are input includes the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5, and the right gradation control IC6. It is prepared for.

[Blinking control IC4]
In this embodiment, the blinking control IC 4 uses TB62709 manufactured by Shibaura Electric, Tokyo. The TB 62709 is a constant current driver and can directly drive a light emitting diode or the like. The operation result of the logical product IC3B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA1 is input to the DATA-IN terminal of the blinking control IC4, and the operation of the logical product IC3C of the switch circuit 860b is input to the CLOCK terminal of the blinking control IC4. The result, that is, the clock signal S-CLK is input, and the calculation result of the logical product IC3D of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the latch signal S-LATCH1 is input to the LOAD terminal of the blinking control IC4. The serial data S-DATA1 captured by the blinking control IC 4 is described later in detail, but the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 is controlled to become blinking data.

  As described above, the flashing control IC 4 takes in the serial data S-DATA1 (flashing data), and when the latch signal S-LATCH1 is input, based on the fetched serial data S-DATA1 (flashing data). The flashing signal is output from the OUT-a terminal to the OUT-g terminal to the upper light emitter 217C. This blinking signal is a constant current, and this constant current flows to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is turned on or blinks.

[Left side gradation control IC 5 and right side gradation control IC 6]
In the present embodiment, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 use TLC 5922 manufactured by Texas Instruments (TI). This TLC5922 has 16 channels of output, and each output channel can flow a programmable constant current in the range of 0 to 80 milliamperes (mA) in addition to individual ON / OFF control. Is set based on the MODE signal). In addition, a maximum output current can be set by one external resistor (not shown), and the output current can be output for each channel in 128 steps from 0 to 127 with respect to this maximum output current.

  The calculation result of the logical product IC2B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA1, is input to the SIN terminal of the left gradation control IC5, and the SCLK terminals of the left gradation control IC5 and the right gradation control IC6 are input to the SIN terminal. Is the operation result of the logical product IC2C of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the clock signal S-CLK, and the XLAT terminals of the left gradation control IC5 and the right gradation control IC6 are connected to the logical product IC2D of the switch circuit 860b. An operation result, that is, a latch signal S-LATCH1 is input. Further, the SOUT terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 and the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6 are electrically connected, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are daisy chain connected. Yes. Thus, the serial data S-DATA1 input to the SIN terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 is input from the SOUT terminal to the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC. The IC 6 can take in the serial data S-DATA1. The mode signal S-MODE is input to the MODE terminals of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. The serial data S-DATA1 taken in by the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 will be described in detail later, but the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 is controlled to control gradation data and lighting. The gradation lighting data is composed of data.

  As described above, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 capture the serial data S-DATA1 (gradation lighting data), and when the latch signal S-LATCH1 is input, capture the data. Based on the serial data S-DATA1 (gradation lighting data), the left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal from its OUT0 to OUT15 terminals to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 A gradation lighting signal is output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT15 terminal to the right light emitter 217B. In the gradation lighting signal, a current of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current based on the set gradation data flows to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B. Lights up or gradations.

[Output sequence of blinking data and gradation lighting data]
Next, an output sequence of serial data S-DATA1 output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) of the peripheral control board 510 described above will be described. As described above, the serial data S-DATA1 is composed of blinking data and gradation data, and a plurality of serial data S-DATA1 are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 510 as a table. The peripheral control MPU creates these as serial data S-DATA1 with reference to those tables as necessary, and outputs them to the door decoration drive board 860.

  FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example of an output sequence of serial data. As shown in FIG. 62, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510 outputs the select signal SEL0 from the parallel input / output port with the logic HI and outputs the select signal SEL1 with the logic LOW (timing T0). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to LOW, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DATA1 is blinking data.

  After the timing T0, the blinking data output sequence is started (timing T1), and the blinking data, which is the serial data S-DATA1, is synchronized with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port to the door decoration drive board 860 by 1 bit. 61, and the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 is outputted LOW from the parallel input / output port, whereby the blinking control IC 4 of the door decoration drive board 860 shown in FIG. 61 takes in the blinking data. Thereafter, when all flashing data is output from the serial input / output port, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, whereby the flashing control IC 4 takes in the latch signal S-LATCH1 as an opportunity. Based on the blink data, a blink signal is output to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is lit or blinks.

  After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port (timing T2). This completes the blinking data output sequence.

  After timing T2, the logic of the select signal SEL0 is output from the parallel input / output port from HI to LOW, and the output sequence of gradation lighting data is started (timing T3). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to LOW and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to HI, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DAT is gradation data.

  After the timing T3, the grayscale data as the serial data S-DATA1 is output from the serial input / output port to the door decoration driving substrate 860 bit by bit in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S is output from the parallel input / output port. When the logic of -LATCH1 is set to LOW and output, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 of the door decoration drive substrate 860 shown in FIG. 61 capture gradation lighting data. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is HI, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data among gradation lighting data.

  When all of the grayscale data is output from the serial input / output port, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port. The logic of LATCH1 is output from HI to LOW. Then, the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is changed from HI to LOW from the parallel input / output port. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is LOW, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 take in the lighting data among the gradation lighting data. When all the lighting data among the gradation lighting data is output from the serial input / output port, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 and the mode signal S-MODE is changed from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port. The IC5 and the right gradation control IC 6 output the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A based on the gradation data captured with the latch signal S-LATCH1 as an opportunity, and the right floor The tone control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B are lighted or gradation lighted.

  After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH1 and the mode signal S-MODE is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from the parallel input / output port to LOW (timing T4). Thereby, the output sequence of the gradation lighting data is completed.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above includes the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860. The peripheral control board 510 mounts a peripheral control MPU which is a microprocessor with a built-in serial input / output port and parallel input / output port. The door decoration drive board 860 is provided separately from the peripheral control board 510, and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the serial data S-DATA1 output from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Then, a gradation lighting signal is output to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B.

  The door decoration drive substrate 860 includes a blinking control IC 4, a left gradation control IC 5, a right gradation control IC 6, and a selection circuit 860a. The blinking control IC 4 takes in the blinking data of the serial data S-DATA1, and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 takes in the gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA1, and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A. The right gradation control IC 6 takes in the gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA1, and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B. The select circuit 860a outputs the serial data S-DATA1 to the blinking control IC4 based on the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output ports of the peripheral control MPU, or the left gradation control IC5 and the right side. To output to the gray scale control IC 6.

  The serial data S-DATA1 is composed of the blinking data of the blinking control IC 4 and the gradation lighting data of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6, and the format of the blinking data and gradation lighting data Are different.

  As described above, the serial data S-DATA1 is composed of the blinking data of the blinking control IC 4 and the gradation lighting data of the gradation control IC 5 for the left side and the gradation control IC 6 for the right side, which have different data formats. The select circuit 860a switches whether to output the serial data S-DATA1 to the blinking control IC 4 or to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. Therefore, even if the blinking control IC 4, the left-side gradation control IC 5, and the right-side gradation control IC 6 having different formats of the serial data S-DATA 1 to be captured can be handled as one serial data S-DATA 1.

  The blinking control IC 4 captures the blinking data and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data composed of gradation data and lighting data. The left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  The serial data S-DATA1 is composed of blinking data and gradation lighting data having different formats, and the select circuit 860a receives two select signals SEL0 and SEL1 from the parallel input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. When the logic of the select signal SEL0 is HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 is LOW, the blinking data is output to the blinking control IC 4, while the logic of the select signal SEL0 is LOW and the select signal SEL1 When is HI, the gradation lighting data is output to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6.

  In this way, the single serial data S-DATA1, the flashing data to the flashing control IC4, the grayscale lighting data to the grayscale control IC5 for the left side and the grayscale lighting data to the right side grayscale control IC6, and the select signal input to the select circuit 860a. It can be output by SEL0 and SEL1. Accordingly, the blinking control IC 4 can output a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the fetched blinking data, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are based on the fetched gradation lighting data. Thus, the left gradation control IC 5 can output a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 can output a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  Further, when the logics of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a are both HI or LOW, that is, when they are the same logic, the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5 and the right floor are controlled by the switch circuit 860b. The serial data S-DATA1, the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S-LATCH1 are not output to the adjustment control IC 6. When noise enters the select signals SEL0 and SEL1, the logic becomes the same (same logic). Using this property, when the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a becomes the same logic, the switch circuit 860b converts the serial data S-DATA1 affected by the noise into the blinking control IC 4 and the left side. No output is made to the grayscale control IC 5 and the right grayscale control IC 6. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA1.

  As described above, when the gaming unit is attached to and detached from the opening 109 of the outer main body 100, the connector holder 428 is detachably coupled to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connector 425 (main control) of the connector holder 428 is attached. System wiring connector) and connector 124 (main relay connector) of main relay board 122 are detachably connected, and connector 427 (peripheral control system wiring connector) of connector holder 428 and peripheral relay are connected. Since the connector 125 (peripheral relay connector) of the board 123 is detachably connected, only two connectors are required for connection, so the number of connectors used for connection can be reduced, and when changing models , Separation / combination of game units as a model-dependent part of the model-independent body part It can be carried out easily.

  Since the lighting control data is output as serial data from the serial output port of the microprocessor (peripheral control MPU) of the peripheral control board 510 and transmitted to the drive circuit 860c of the door decoration drive board 860 by serial communication, the peripheral relay The number of harnesses from the board 123 to the door decoration drive board 860 can be reduced (result of being able to use one signal line for transmitting lighting control data as one of S-DATA1), and the door-shaped front member The number of harnesses in the bent portion near the hinge attached to the front side of the outer body 100 so that the 200 can rotate is reduced, and the harness is sandwiched between the door-shaped front member 200 and the outer body 100. The fear can be kept low (the trouble of damaging the harness can be drastically reduced), and the reliability is improved.

  The example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1 has been described above. In a game by the slot machine 1 having such a configuration, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the effective line, which will be described later. And a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded as necessary.

  Hereinafter, the structure and control for realizing the game playability performed by the slot machine 1 in a more characteristic manner will be described in more detail.

[Design of each reel, design row]
Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a symbol row (sequence numbers 1 to 14) configured by arranging a plurality of types (any one of a total of 9 types in this figure) at regular intervals. Reel bands (design bands) 351a, 351b, 351c on which a total of 14 symbols shown in FIG. FIG. 63 shows a state in which the symbol rows described on the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  In each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols has openings 591a (also referred to as symbol display windows, hereinafter symbols). It is arranged so as to be visible via a display window 591a (see FIG. 64 described next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the types of symbols are “Red 7” symbols (hereinafter referred to as “Red 7 symbols”, which correspond to three of the arrangement numbers 11 of the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c), and , “White 7” symbols (hereinafter referred to as White 7 symbols, which corresponds to the arrangement number 2 of the reel band 351c), which are larger than the other symbols. In addition, the “red 7” symbol is filled with red inside, and “white 7” is filled with white inside. In this way, the red 7 symbol and the white 7 symbol are larger and relatively conspicuous compared to the other symbols, so that it is easier to visually recognize than the other symbols.

  Also, “a symbol shaped“ S ””, hereinafter referred to as “S” symbol ”(for example, the arrangement number 1 of the reel band 351a, etc.),“ a symbol shaped “M child”, M "Child design" (for example, the arrangement number 3 of the reel band 351a, etc.), "Character" E man ", hereinafter referred to as the E man design" (for example, the arrangement number 4 of the reel band 351a, etc.) "The design that shaped the character" H man ", hereinafter referred to as the H man design" (for example, the arrangement number 5 of the reel band 351a), "The design that shaped the character" I man ", and below, the I man "Design" (for example, the arrangement number 1 of the reel band 351b, etc.), "the design of the character" M man ", hereinafter referred to as the M man design" (for example, the arrangement number 2 of the reel band 351b), "Character" T child "shape Tsu was the symbol, "that T child pattern in the following (for example, of the reel band 351b SEQ ID NO: No. 3, etc.), there is.

  As described above, there are a total of nine types of symbols on the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c. The reel band 351a has five types (S male, M child, E male, H male, red 7), and the reel band 351b has four types (I male, M male, T child, red 7), and the reel band 351c. There are 6 types of symbols (S male, white 7, E male, M child, H male, red 7).

[Effective line]
FIG. 64 shows the decorative member 591 partially enlarged around the symbol display window 591a. From the symbol display window 591a, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where the symbols are displayed are referred to as “upper (or upper)”, “middle (or middle)” and “lower (or lower)” from the top.

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 591a. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 591a from “number of stages (3) × number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the right portion (right side as viewed from the symbol display window 591a) of the decorative member 591 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 591 in the following), of which "BET1" BET lamps (BET lamps) 614 are labeled “BET2” and “BET3”. The numbers of the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2 and 3 of the above-mentioned “BET 1”, “BET 2”, “BET 3”) are the numbers of bets (the numbers corresponding to the number of multiplied medals). It corresponds. In other words, “1” is 1 bet (the number of medals multiplied is 1), “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals multiplied is 2), and “3” is 3 bets (also called a MAX bet). The number of medals is 3).

  An arrangement (straight line type) that is valid according to the number of bets is determined in advance. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. The following is unified with the active line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 591a, if the respective symbols are not arranged on one active line, the predetermined winning combination It is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to is displayed. In such a case, it is determined that a disparate combination pattern is displayed.

  Next, general items regarding the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets and the number of active lines will be described. The effective line corresponding to one bet is only one effective line 621 (middle stage line 621) arranged in a "middle stage-middle stage-middle stage" connecting the middle positions of the reels. This is called “1 BET line”.

  In the case of 2-bet, in addition to the above-described 1 BET line, an effective line 622a (upper line 622a) arranged in an "upper stage-upper stage-upper stage" connecting the upper stage positions of the reels and a lower stage position of each reel are connected. Two effective lines, the effective line 622b (lower line 622b) arranged in the order of “lower stage-lower stage-lower stage”, are newly added. The two effective lines of the upper line and the lower line are collectively referred to as “2 BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 2 bets, there are a total of 3 active lines.

  In the case of 3 bets, in addition to the 1BET line and 2BET line described above, the lower right row is connected to the upper position of the left reel, the middle position of the middle reel, and the lower position of the right reel. The line 623b (downwardly right line 623b) and the effective line 623a (right side) of “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” connecting the lower stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the upper stage position of the right reel are “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” Two effective lines of the rising line 623a) are newly added. The two effective lines of the right-up line and the right-down line are collectively referred to as “3BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 3 bets, there are a total of 5 active lines.

  The above is an explanation of an effective line of a spinning-reel game machine represented by a general slot machine, but the effective line is not limited to the linear type as described above. Furthermore, it is not restricted to the aspect which increases the corresponding effective line whenever the number of bets increases as mentioned above. Below, the effective line of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated concretely using FIG. FIG. 65 is a view for explaining an effective line of the slot machine of the present embodiment.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the multiplier is only 3 bets (MAX bets). Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the effective line 623b (right downward line 623b) arranged in the right-down direction in the symbol display window 591a of FIG. As shown in FIG. 64, the effective line includes a right-up effective line 623a (upward-right line 623a) that becomes "lower stage-middle stage-upper stage" in the symbol display window 591a of FIG. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, lines other than the above (middle stage line 621, upper stage line 622a, and lower stage line 622b) are not included in the effective lines.

  Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment also has an irregular effective line different from the linear effective line. As shown in FIG. 65 (c), the irregular-type effective lines are V-shaped effective lines having a relatively large angle of “upper-middle-upper” in the symbol display window 591a of FIG. 624a (large-angle V-shaped line 624a) and an inverted V-shape having a relatively large angle of “lower stage-middle stage-lower stage” in the symbol display window 591a of FIG. 64, as shown in FIG. Are effective lines 624b (large-angle inverted V-shaped lines 624b).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, two patterns of linear effective lines (upward-right line 623a, right-downline 623b) and two patterns of irregular-type effective lines (large-angle V-shaped lines 624a, There are a total of four effective lines including a large-angle inverted V-shaped line 624b).

  Thereby, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called “break” (an eye composed of symbols with different symbol combinations), the player can grasp the winning combination. Although it is difficult to determine whether or not the combination corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called scatter, it is difficult to determine whether or not the winning combination has been displayed in one of the upper, middle and lower rows Since only four are valid and there are four valid combinations, it is possible to grasp if the player has an intention to grasp the winning combination. In addition, some of the rotating display bodies are invalidated despite the fact that one symbol is displayed on each of the upper, middle, and lower stages in the small window portion. The motion stop control is not complicated, and the control load is not increased easily.

  The effective line is not limited to the above line. For example, for any one of three rows of reels 301a to 301c arranged side by side in the left-right direction, the effective line must pass through the symbols represented in any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages. In addition, the other two columns may pass through the symbols represented in any one of the two stages selected from the upper, middle and lower stages. According to this, there are four effective lines, and the “lower-upper-lower” angle is a V-shaped line with a relatively small angle (not shown) and “upper-lower-upper”. An inverted V-shaped line (not shown) having a relatively small angle can also be an effective line.

  In addition, when a position expressed at a position where an effective line passes is referred to as an effective position, any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages is an effective position for the one column (that is, the one column) There is only one effective position on the upper side), and for the other two columns other than the one column, two of the upper, middle and lower levels are effective positions. As a result, even if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived, since there is only one valid position for the one row, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are always valid. It will be expressed in the position.

  Even in such a case, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called disparity, it is possible to grasp if the player has an intention to grasp the winning combination. In addition, some of the rotating display bodies are invalidated despite the fact that one symbol is displayed on each of the upper, middle, and lower stages in the small window portion. The motion stop control is not complicated, and the control load is not increased easily.

[Game state display section]
In addition, the display panel 591 is provided with indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. And the area | region where these indicators are arrange | positioned comprises the game state display part for a player to grasp | ascertain the various states regarding the slot machine 1. FIG. Note that the lighting (or blinking) control of various indicators in the gaming status display unit is executed by the gaming status display board 450 described above.

  In the game state display portion, from the upper side in FIG. 64, an error lamp 604 with characters “ERR” drawn, a stop lamp 605 with characters “OFF” drawn, and the BET lamp 614 are located immediately below. A replay lamp 606 with the letters “REP”, a start lamp 608 with the letters “STR”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and two horizontal 7-segment LEDs. Each provided payout number display LED 612 is provided. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The stop lamp 605 is configured such that when the stop switch described above is set to ON and the player enters a stop state in which a medal is not accepted after the bonus game is over, It also has a role to inform the staff in charge).

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 shows combinations of symbols corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine 1 and their benefits (the number of payouts, etc., hereinafter referred to as “game benefits”). Note that FIG. 66 may be displayed on the display panel 591 or the like as a payout table for the player (a simple description of the gaming benefits of each winning combination).

  As described above, the reels 351a, 351b, and 351c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively. The order of symbols, the types of symbols, etc. are different for each reel band. For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed in the symbol display window 591a. There is nothing. In addition, as long as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 591a, the order of symbols and the types of symbols of several reel bands may be the same.

  Whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed from display contents (a symbol combination mode) displayed in the symbol display window 591a when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. Is judged. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the above-described active lines in the symbol display window 591a. That is, in the slot machine 1, there are four active lines (four lines) (a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 591a).

  In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to a (predetermined) winning combination (referred to as a winning combination symbol) means that a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines. It is said that the winning symbols are aligned.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, “S man symbol”, “M child symbol”, “E man symbol”, “H man symbol”, “I man symbol”, As described above, there are “M male symbol” and “T child symbol”. Among them, “Red 7 symbol” and “White 7 symbol” are more conspicuous than other symbols. The design is easy. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. Among these, there is only one “red 7 symbol” on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and in addition, the color is easier to visually recognize than red and other symbols. The “white 7 symbols” are only in the right reel 301c, and the number is one. In addition, since the color is also white, it is easier to visually recognize than other designs. These symbols are easy for a player to make a target symbol because of the color and the size of the symbol even while the reel is rotating.

  These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol alone does not correspond to a winning role. However, as will be described later, if the winning role is a cherry, only one symbol will win the winning role. Corresponding), it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. In the following, a combination pattern of predetermined symbols corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 66 will be described.

[Big Bonus, Regular Bonus]
As shown in FIG. 66, the winning combination indicated as BB is a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB). In this BB, “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (BB symbol). In other words, when the combination of symbols consisting of all “red 7 symbols” is aligned on one effective line, the BB symbols are aligned.

  When the BB symbols are aligned, a gaming bonus called a big bonus game (hereinafter referred to as BB game) is given. This BB game is concentrated on a plurality of games where it is easy to obtain medals, and is continuously executed until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 400) are paid out as a prize. When the paid-out medals reach the prescribed number (or may exceed the prescribed number), the BB game ends.

  Further, in this slot machine 1, medals are not awarded when the BB symbols are aligned (the game with the BB symbols aligned). That is, having the BB symbols together serves as an opportunity to move to the BB game. Further, since only one BB symbol is arranged on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (see FIG. 63), the BB symbol is accurately aimed in the symbol display window 591a (the controllable range to be pulled in later). BB symbols cannot be aligned unless a stop operation (operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is performed. As described above, the stop operation aiming at the target symbol (in this example, the BB symbol), that is, “to push”, means that the skill (or technology or player in the slot machine 1 represented by the slot machine 1 is This is one of the operations that must be performed intentionally).

  Therefore, if the player's skill to “push” is high (mainly a player who is highly skilled in the game, such as a player who is highly skilled in the game), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 591a) ) Can be displayed (stopped) easily. On the other hand, if the player's skill to “push” is low (mainly an inexperienced player, such as a player with a low level of game skill), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 591a) ) Is not easy to display (stop) (can be said to be difficult).

  Furthermore, when the BB game ends, a gaming privilege of a third RT game (a game executed based on a hit value determination table shown in FIG. 69D described later) is given (details will be described later). In the third RT game, a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, it becomes easier to win a predetermined winning combination for a certain period). That is, when the BB symbols are prepared, in addition to being able to acquire medals in the BB game, an additional privilege (for example, more medals can be acquired, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is given. Become.

  The winning combination indicated as RB is a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The combination mode of the symbols when the RB symbols are aligned is “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol”.

  When the RB symbols are arranged, a gaming bonus called a regular bonus game (hereinafter referred to as RB game) is given. This RB game is performed in a concentrated manner, with multiple games that make it easy to obtain medals, and continues to run until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 120) are paid out compared to when the BB game is executed. Is done. When the paid-out medals reach the prescribed number (or may exceed the prescribed number), the RB game ends. It should be noted that the RB game may be terminated when the specified number of games is continued (for example, eight times) and reached, or the specified number of games is reached. The RB game may be terminated when any one of the conditions is reached. Whether the RB game reaches a specified number of games (for example, 12 times) or whether the specified number of winnings is reached during the RB game period (for example, wins 8 times for any winning role). The RB game may be ended when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

  Even when RB symbols are arranged, medals are not given in the game, and only a role as an opportunity to shift to the RB game is provided. In addition, each of the symbols constituting the RB symbol (7 red symbols and 7 white symbols) is arranged only one on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c as in the case of the BB symbol (see FIG. 63). , It becomes a design that needs to be pressed.

  Furthermore, when the RB game ends, a gaming privilege of a fourth RT game (a game performed based on a hit value determination table shown in FIG. 70A described later) is given (details will be described later). This fourth RT game is also provided with a third RT which is given after the end of the BB game in that a state advantageous to the player (for example, it becomes easier to win a predetermined winning combination for a certain period of time) continues for a predetermined number of times. It is the same as the game. In other words, when the RB symbols are arranged, an additional privilege (for example, more medals can be obtained) is given that a small amount of medals are obtained in the RB game and that the player is in an advantageous state. Become.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, there is an opportunity for the player to concentrate and acquire medals through two bonus games, the BB game and the RB game. However, only the BB game allows the player to win a large number of medals. In the slot machine 1, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game (for example, 15) is determined in advance, and the number of medals to be paid out as a single game result does not exceed this maximum number. It has become. Therefore, although the number of medals that can be acquired from the start to the end of the RB game is larger than the maximum number (15) that can be acquired in one game, the BB game starts. Compared to the number of medals that can be acquired from the end of the game to the end, it is considerably smaller (about 1/4).

[Replay (Replay 1, Replay 2)]
As shown in FIG. 66, “H male design-I male design-H male design” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding design (replay 1 design) for the winning combination shown as Replay 1 (RP1). It has been.

  When the replay 1 pattern is ready, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, a game to be played as the next game can be executed as a replay without inserting medals or betting again (being automatically bet). In this case, the number of effective lines is the same as the number of effective lines of the game with replay symbols.

  For the winning combination indicated as Replay 2 (RP2), “H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol” is previously determined as a combination aspect of the corresponding symbol (Replay 2 symbol).

  When the replay 2 symbols are aligned, a game privilege called a replay game is given in the same manner as when the replay 1 symbols are aligned. Even in this replay game, a game to be executed as the next game can be executed as a replay without newly inserting medals or performing a betting operation (betting automatically). In this case, the number of effective lines is the same as the number of effective lines of the game with replay symbols.

  Here, when the replay 1 symbols are prepared, even if the replay game is performed, the subsequent game state is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the provision of the privilege are completed in one game. On the other hand, after the replay 2 symbols are assembled and the replay game is performed, depending on the gaming state when the replay 2 symbols as the winning combination are aligned (when the replay 2 is won), the first RT game (FIG. 69 described later). (Game played based on the winning value determination table shown in (b)) in some cases (details will be described later). As described above, the two types of replays (replay 1 and replay 2) are the same in that the next game can be executed as a replay, but have a significance in terms of whether or not to shift to the first RT game thereafter. Is different.

  In the present specification, “winning” means that the lottery is won, and the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line on the condition that the lottery is won. However, if the above-described “promotion” fails, even if the lottery is won, the winning symbol may not be aligned on the active line.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, two types (replay 1 and replay 2) are provided for the “replay” as the winning category, and hence, when simply referred to as “replay”, replay 1 and replay are referred to below. 2 shall be referred to.

  As described above, even when the replay symbols are arranged, no medal is given, and a role as an opportunity to shift to the replay game is given. A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume a new medal (bet operation) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, the slot machine 1 has a probability of winning about once in seven times (details will be described later). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, by providing a winning combination called replay, it is possible to have a role of suppressing excessive consumption of medals in the progress of the game.

  Further, the replay symbols are evenly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, other symbols arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols (a different type of symbols from the replay symbols) from one. By using a maximum of four), it is possible to align the replay symbols without the need for pressing. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[Bell (Bell 1, Bell 2)]
As shown in FIG. 66, “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol” is determined in advance as a combination pattern of the corresponding symbol (bell 1 symbol) for the winning combination indicated by bell 1. .

  When the bell 1 symbols are aligned, a prescribed number (for example, 5) of medals is paid out. At this time, the payout of medals is performed when the game ends. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 5 medals is awarded when the Bell 1 symbols are aligned.

  In addition, “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol” is determined in advance as a combination aspect of the corresponding symbol (bell 2 symbol) for the winning combination indicated as bell 2.

  When the bell 2 symbols are aligned, a prescribed number (for example, 5) of medals is paid out in the same manner as when the bell 1 symbols are aligned. The payout of medals at this time is also performed in the game. That is, when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out 5 medals is given.

  Here, when the bell 1 symbols are prepared, even if five medals are paid out, the game state after that is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the granting are completed in one game. . On the other hand, after the 5 medals have been paid out with the Bell 2 symbols aligned, depending on the gaming state when the Bell 2 symbols as the winning roles are aligned (when Bell 2 is won), the second RT game ( There is a case where the game proceeds to a game executed based on a hit value determination table shown in FIG. 69C described later (details will be described later). In this way, the two types of bells (Bell 1 and Bell 2) are the same in that a gaming privilege such as payout of 5 medals is given, but whether or not to move to the second RT game thereafter. And the existence significance is different.

  In the present embodiment, since “Bell” as the winning category is provided with two types (Bell 1 and Bell 2) as described above, hereinafter, when simply referred to as “Bell”, Bell 1 and Bell 2 shall be referred to.

  Thus, it can be said that Bell is a winning role that can be expected to increase the number of medals and reduce the consumption of medals as the game progresses. However, if the frequency of winning the bell increases, the player can increase the medals simply by proceeding with the game (there may be an increase in medals without winning BB or RB). The game performance of the slot machine 1 is impaired. It is also feared that it will be easy for players to win excessive medals and the profit balance with the hole will be lost. For these reasons, the winning role of Bell has only a role to prevent the player from consuming a large amount of medals in the progress of the game, and the winning probability is kept low compared to replay . Accordingly, there is no problem even if the bell symbols are arranged evenly on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c and aligned without needing to be pressed, like the above-described replay symbols. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[watermelon]
As shown in FIG. 66, “E male symbol-I male symbol-E male symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (watermelon symbol) for the winning combination indicated as watermelon.

  When the watermelon symbols are aligned, a larger number of medals (for example, 9) are paid out than when the bell symbols are aligned. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the watermelon symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out nine medals is given. That is, when the watermelon symbols are prepared, even if nine medals are paid out, the subsequent gaming state is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the provision of the bonus are completed in one game.

  As for the watermelon, just like the bell above, it plays a role that prevents the player from consuming a large amount of medals in the progress of the game and keeps the winning probability lower than the replay. . Furthermore, since watermelon pays out more medals than a bell and has a high overlapping ratio with a bonus as will be described later, the winning probability is kept lower than that of a bell. Accordingly, the watermelon symbols are also arranged evenly on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (especially the right reel 301c) in the same manner as the above-described replay symbols (in this case, other watermelon symbols are arranged between the watermelon symbol and the watermelon symbol). By changing the number of symbols from 1 to a maximum of 4), there is no problem even if the watermelon symbols can be aligned without the need for pressing. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[Cherry]
As shown in FIG. 66, a corresponding symbol (cherry symbol) is determined in advance for the winning combination indicated as cherry. As for the cherry symbol, only one cherry symbol appears on the effective line, such as “ANY-M male symbol-ANY” (in this example, only the middle reel 301b stops at the middle stage). It is considered that the pattern is complete. Here, “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. When the cherry symbols are arranged, a predetermined number (for example, three) of medals are paid out in the game.

  Therefore, it is not determined that the cherry symbols are arranged according to the combination of symbols in a state where all the reels are stopped, but only for at least one reel, the symbols displayed on the active line when the reels are stopped. It can be said that it is determined that they are aligned. However, medals are paid out after all reels are stopped. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “at least one reel” described above is the middle reel 301b.

Here, in this embodiment, as is clear from the above-described effective line (see FIG. 65), all of the four effective lines (623a, 623b, 624a, 624b) have the effective line determination position on the middle reel 301b as “ "Middle stage". Therefore, when the cherry symbols are aligned (that is, when the M man symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b), the cherry symbols are always aligned on the four effective lines. Therefore, the number of payouts at this time is
[3 (cherry payout number) x 4 (number of active lines) = 12]
It becomes. That is, when the cherry symbols are arranged, a gaming privilege of paying out 12 medals is given.

  As with the bells and watermelons described above, the cherries are only given a role that prevents the player from consuming a large amount of medals in the progress of the game, and the winning probability is kept lower than the replay. ing. In addition, cherries have the highest payout of medals compared to other small roles such as bells and watermelons, and the percentage of overlapping with bonuses is extremely high as will be described later. Probability is kept low.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described replay symbols, the cherry symbols are arranged on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (especially the middle reel 301c), so that the cherry symbols are surely not pressed. It is a design that cannot be aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63, by arranging only one cherry symbol on the middle reel 301c and only one on this middle reel 301c, it is difficult to align the cherry symbols unless they are pressed. ing. In addition, in order to make the cherry symbol a symbol that needs to be pressed, in each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, the number of other symbols arranged between the cherry symbol and the cherry symbol can be drawn. The number may exceed the range.

  From these facts, the cherry is a winning combination that is judged to be complete if the cherry symbols are displayed on the active line in a state where the reel is stopped only for at least one reel, and the maximum number of payouts is given. It will be a winning role.

  In addition, since the above-described bell, watermelon, and cherry are all winning combinations corresponding to the gaming privilege of paying out medals, these will be collectively referred to as “small roles” as necessary.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bell, watermelon, and cherry are described as small roles. However, in addition to these, small roles can be provided. For example, a different type of symbol from the bell symbol, watermelon symbol and cherry symbol is provided, and the corresponding number of medals to be paid out (specified number) is differentiated from the above small roles, or each reel 301a, It is also possible to reduce the number of symbols 301b and 301c to be given a difficulty level as a winning symbol that needs to be pressed.

[Bonus exclusive role]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 66, there is a bonus exclusive combination as a winning combination effective only during the BB game (and RB game). “E male symbol-T child symbol-E male symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of symbols (bonus exclusive symbol) corresponding to the bonus exclusive symbol.

  When the bonus exclusive role symbols are arranged during the BB game (hereinafter also including the RB game), a predetermined number (for example, 15) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 15 medals is awarded when the bonus exclusive role symbols are aligned. That is, it can be said that the bonus exclusive combination is a small combination limited during the BB game. Further, during the BB game, by making it easy to arrange the bonus exclusive roles, it is possible to concentrate and execute a game that is easy to obtain medals. Therefore, since each symbol (E male symbol-T child symbol-E male symbol) constituting the combination of the bonus exclusive role symbol is arranged uniformly on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c as described above, It can be aligned without the need for an eye-opener.

  In the RB game, a winning combination different from the bonus exclusive combination may be provided. Furthermore, the bell or cherry may be used instead without providing a bonus game medium limited small role such as a bonus exclusive role.

[Loose]
If none of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 66 is applicable, the game is lost. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. It can be said that the loser is a winning combination that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination. From these, it can be said that in the slot machine 1, all winning winning symbols except for the bonus symbols (BB symbol and RB symbol) and cherry symbols can be aligned without the need for a selection. That is, it is possible to reduce a situation where the player is constantly strained (concentrated) and tired by making a special effort in every game, and the game can be smoothly advanced.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed by the main control board 409 (mainly the main control MPU).

  FIG. 67 shows one processing procedure for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the multiplier is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, the MAX bet button 206 (or 1 bet button 205) is pressed. Then, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the BET process is executed until the multiplication of one game is determined and the start lever 210 can be operated.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of the lottery corresponds to any winning combination, the corresponding winning combination is allowed.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has been stopped, the display content displayed on the active line (the combination of symbols) and the above step A determination process for determining the winning combination is performed by checking what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in S3.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination is BB, RB, or replay, granting is performed for various game benefits such as a change in game state or replay.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[Startup process]
FIG. 68 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the insertion of medals or the operation of the 1 bet button 205 and the MAX bet button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. Note that this determination is satisfied only when a medal corresponding to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, when three or more medals are inserted) or when a single bet button 205 or a MAX bet button 206 is operated as a MAX bet. It is supposed to be.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the main control board 409 (main control MPU) in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, random numbers are extracted in response to the operation. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S107, as a flag process, it is determined (random number value collation) which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value). In this determination, the extracted random number value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination that is ON (= 1) at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. In addition to the BB game flag, the game status flag includes an RB game flag, a first RT game flag, a second RT game flag, a third game flag, a fourth RT game flag, and a fifth RT game (FIG. 70 described later). There is a game) flag that is played based on the winning value determination table shown in (b). When any of these game state flags is in the OFF (= 0) state, the normal game in-progress flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the lost flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag can be aligned only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, when the lost flag corresponds to the established flag, none of the winning combination symbols can be arranged. It can also be said that the above-described steps S106 and S107 are random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 67 described above).

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). This means that a predetermined winning combination is won. Here, the result of the game in which the corresponding winning combination is permitted is reflected in the subsequent processes (reel stop process, determination process, payout process, etc.) as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery as the “establishment flag” described above. Will be.

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined as, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1, random numbers in the extraction range are set to 0 to 16383 (214 = 16384 random values), but 0 to 32767 (215 = 32768 random values) or 0 to 65535 ( 216 = 65536 random number values). If the extraction range of random numbers is expanded, the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random number values are extracted in a biased manner.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to BB is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 16383), the result of the internal lottery is “BB” when the extracted random value is “1”. BB's internal lottery flag (established flag, in this case also referred to as the aforementioned winning flag) is processed as an information command in the game. In addition, when this is used, the winning probability of BB (probability that BB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB. Speaking of the above example (BB)
[Total number of random values corresponding to BB / Total number of random values in the extraction range]
Is 1/16384, and the winning probability of BB is 1/16384.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined (set), and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to BB. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of BB is a continuous random value “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” in the extraction range, the range of the winning value of BB Is a random value from “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning BB”.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  69 and 70 specifically show the winning values and the internal lottery probabilities for all winning combinations of the slot machine 1. Each of these is previously stored in the main control board 409 (mainly the main control MPU) as a hit value determination table. The hit value determination table stores a plurality of hit value determination tables having different internal lottery probabilities for the normal state and all of RT1 to 6 (generally referred to as set values, for example, settings 1 to 6). The setting value can be set to any one of the six setting values). 69 and 70 are hit value determination tables in the case of setting 1 among the plurality of setting values.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose (a range of random values) in a game in a normal state (referred to as a normal game) (referred to as a normal game determination table). Here, for BB and RB, only BB or a range of winning values that are only RB (referred to as single winning value), “BB + other winning combination (replay, bell, watermelon, cherry)”, “RB + Other winning roles (Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Cherry) ”,“ One Minor (Cherry) + Other Minor (Watermelon) different from the one Minor ”range of winning value (per shared winning Value). In addition, a winning value for “replay + winning winning combination (bell, watermelon, cherry)” may be further included.

  When BB or RB is won, the BB (RB) flag ON state is carried over until the next game, so even if BB symbols or RB symbols are not available in the game won BB or RB, the next BB symbols (RB symbols) can be aligned after the game. On the other hand, when winning other winning roles (Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Cherry), these winning flags will not be carried over after the next game, so the winning symbols may be aligned only in the winning game. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the extracted random number value is a shared winning value of “BB (or RB) + other winning combination”, even if the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is not aligned in the game, the next game or later While it is possible to align, other winning roles (replay, bell, watermelon, cherry) symbols can not be aligned after the next game if they are not aligned in the selected game. Become. However, among other winning combinations, replays, bells and watermelons can be arranged without having to wait for the pull-in control described later.

The single winning value of BB and RB corresponds to only one corresponding winning combination like the single winning value of bell, replay, and the like. That is, in FIG. 69 (a), for example,
When the extracted random number value is “0”, it corresponds to the value for the single winning of Bell 1.
When the extracted random number value is “4100”, it corresponds to the value for the single winning of Bell 2.
When the extracted random number value is “4500”, it corresponds to the single winning value of Replay 1.
When the extracted random number value is “5600”, it corresponds to the single winning value of Replay 2.
When the extracted random number value is “3800”, it corresponds to a single winning value for watermelon.
Similarly,
When the extracted random number value is “6976”, it corresponds to the value per BB single winning.
When the extracted random number value is “6983”, it corresponds to an RB single winning value.
Thus, only one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random number value.

On the other hand, the share winning value of BB and RB is, for example, in FIG.
When the extracted random number value is “6900”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of Bell 1 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6906”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of watermelon + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6926”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of cherry + watermelon + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6966”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of Bell 2 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6974”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of Replay 1 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6975”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of Replay 2 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “6977”, it corresponds to the value of the shared winning of Bell 1 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “6978”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of watermelon + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “6979”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of cherry + watermelon + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “6980”, it corresponds to the value for the shared winning of Bell 2 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “6981”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of Replay 1 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “6982”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of Replay 2 + RB.
As described above, a plurality of winning combinations correspond to one extracted random number value. As described above, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the shared winning value, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. This is because the two winning flags of BB and other winning combination (Bell or Cherry) or 2 of RB and other winning combination (Bell or Cherry) are set in the flag processing (see step S107 in FIG. 68). One winning flag (internal lottery flag) is set to ON simultaneously.

  And for BB and RB, the range of the winning value obtained by summing (summing up) the single winning value and the shared winning value is the winning value for the entire BB and the entire RB. Winning probability can be calculated.

That is,
BB (Overall) 77/16384 (1 / 212.78)
RB (whole) 7/16384 (1 / 2340.57)
Thus, the winning probability of the entire BB and the winning probability of the entire RB are calculated.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), in this embodiment, there is no single winning value for cherry, and a shared winning value with other winning combinations is always set for cherry. Specifically, the shared winning value of Cherry and other small roles is shown in FIG.
When the extracted random number value is “4000”, it corresponds to the winning value of cherry + watermelon.
In this way, the watermelon is won in duplicate for the extracted random value that wins the cherry. Also, with regard to the shared winning value that Cherry wins with bonuses (BB, RB), other small roles (in this case, watermelons) are always also won. That is, only “cherry + watermelon + BB (RB)” is set as the winning combination of cherry and bonus.

  On the other hand, FIG. 70 (c) shows a range of winning values (random number range) for each winning combination and losing in a bonus game (BB game and RB game) (referred to as a bonus game determination table).

  According to this, during the bonus game (BB game and RB game), the lottery of BB and RB and also replay (replay 1 and replay 2) is not performed. During the bonus game, the bonus value of the bonus exclusive combination that is valid only at this time (there is a winning value) occupies most of the extraction range (the total number of winning values is 11523). Therefore, it can be said that during the bonus game, the bonus exclusive role is often won about twice in about three times. In addition, instead of the bonus value of bonus bonus combination increasing, the winning value corresponding to the loss is greatly reduced (total number of winning values is 1). For this reason, it can be said that during the bonus game, the possibility of being extremely lost compared to the base game is reduced.

  According to this, during the bonus game, only the winning combination (Bell 1, Watermelon, Cherry + Watermelon, Bell 2, Bonus exclusive combination) with medals paid out and not missed will be won. For this reason, the player can easily obtain medals without having to keep pressing each time during the bonus game.

  In the slot machine 1, an RT (replay time) game is started in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this embodiment, there are a total of five RT games: a first RT game, a second RT game, a third RT game, a fourth RT game, and a fifth RT game.

  Here, the RT game is a state in which the winning probability of replay is made easier to win than the normal game for a predetermined number of games (game period) (except for the first RT game). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are first RT game to fifth RT game having different winning probabilities such as replay as RT games, and the entry conditions and end conditions are different. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the RT game includes all of the first RT game to the fifth RT game.

  Hereinafter, features of each RT game determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

  FIG. 69 (b) shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and losing in the first RT game (random number range) (referred to as a first RT game determination table). As shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the first RT game determination table, since there is no single winning value for Replay 2, Replay 2 cannot be won alone. Compared with the base game determination table shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first RT game is set so that the random number width of the single per-reward value of Replay 2 is included in the random number width of the single per-reward value of Replay 1. As a whole, the probability of winning the regular game and replay is equal. Except for these points, the first RT game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In this first RT game, the number of medals held by the player decreases as the game progresses. Note that this first RT game is not a bonus game (BB game or RB game) and is a player among the first RT game to the fourth RT game that can be performed when neither BB nor RB is won. Is the most disadvantageous RT game for the player because of the rapid decrease in medals held by the player.

  FIG. 69 (c) shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the second RT game (range of random number values) (referred to as a second RT game determination table). As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the second RT game determination table, since there is no single winning value for Replay 2, Replay 2 cannot be won alone. Compared with the first RT game determination table described above, the random number width of the single hit value of Replay 1 is set to be extremely large, and the random number width of the hit value of the loss is set to be extremely narrow. Except for replay and loss, the second RT game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In this second RT game, the random number range for the single value of Replay 1 is set to be extremely large and the random number range of the value for winning the hit is set to be very narrow, and the player who is not as much as during BB or RB You can play games while you have more medals. That is, in this second RT game, the probability is set so that the number of medals to be paid out by winning a small role during the predetermined game is larger than the number of medals consumed to play the predetermined game. Therefore, as the game progresses, the medal possessed by the player can increase. For example, the number of medals consumed to play 10 games is 30, but the probability of loss and the small number of medals to be paid out by winning a small role during the 10 games exceeds 30. The probability of winning a role is set. Although the details of the second RT game will be described later, the first RT game to the fourth RT game that can be performed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being won and neither BB nor RB is won. Among them, this is the most advantageous RT game for the player because the number of medals held by the player increases.

  FIG. 69 (d) shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and losing in the third RT game (random number range) (referred to as a third RT game determination table). As shown in FIG. 69 (d), in the third RT game determination table, there are single hit values for Replay 1 and Replay 2 as in the normal game, but when compared with the first RT game determination table described above, the replay 1 The random value width of the single hit value is set to be relatively large, and the random number width of the hit value of the loss is set to be relatively narrow. Except for replay and loss, the third RT game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In the third RT game, although the medals held by the player are slightly reduced, the game can be performed while suppressing the decrease of the medals. Therefore, the player can play the game without greatly reducing the medals held. Although the details of the third RT game will be described later, the first RT game to the fourth RT game that can be performed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being won and neither BB nor RB is won. Among them, it is the RT game that is the third most advantageous for the player.

  FIG. 70A shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and losing in the fourth RT game (range of random number values) (referred to as a fourth RT game determination table). As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the fourth RT game determination table, since there is no single winning value for Replay 2, Replay 2 cannot be won alone. Compared to the first RT game determination table described above, the random number width of the single hit value of Replay 1 is set to be large, and the random number width of the hit value of the loss is set to be narrow. Except for replay and loss, the fourth RT game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In the fourth RT game, it is possible to play a game while substantially maintaining the amount of medals held by the player. Although the details of this fourth RT game will be described later, the first RT game to the fourth RT game that can be performed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being won and neither BB nor RB is won. Among them, the RT game is the second most advantageous for the player.

  FIG. 70 (b) shows a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the fifth RT game (range of random number values) (referred to as a fifth RT game determination table). As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the fifth RT game determination table, compared to the above-mentioned normal game determination table, the random number range of the winning value of the loss is almost the same, while the single winning value of the bonus and the bonus Since there is no per-duplication value, you cannot win a bonus. Note that the random number widths of other small roles (bell, watermelon, replay, etc.) are substantially equal to those of the normal game determination table. In the fifth RT game, details will be described later, but the number of medals held by the player decreases as the game progresses.

[Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. In FIG. 71, as an example, the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method” are shown. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to an internal lottery flag indicating the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns are prepared in advance for all the internal lottery flags, and these are stored in the main control board 409 (mainly the main control MPU) as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the internal lottery flag in the above step S201, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (steps S202, S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is a stop operation procedure (or pressing sequence) called “forward press”, “reverse press”, and “middle press”, respectively. Say).

The above-described “forward press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211a first). From the reel operation order to stop after
[Left reel → Middle reel → Right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Left reel → Right reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “forward push”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure may also be called “order scissors push”.

The above-described “reverse push” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure in which the right reel 301c is stopped first as opposed to “forward push” (that is, a procedure in which the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first). From the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the second,
[Right reel-> middle reel-> left reel]
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [right reel → left reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “reverse pressing”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “reverse scissor pressing”.

The above-mentioned “middle push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop process, the control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are the four lines of the right-down line 623b, the right-up line 623a, the V-shaped line 624a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. It is also possible to arrange the corresponding winning combination symbols. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 591a of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper stage position or the lower stage position is the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a possibility, select a reel stop control table that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the active line based on the symbol. Will do. As a result, winning symbols other than the bonus symbol and cherry symbol can be aligned without the need for pressing (details will be described in reel stop control).

  Specifically, for example, it is assumed that a symbol that may become a winning combination symbol stops at the upper position of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) in the symbol display window 591a. In this case, one of the reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels 301b and 301c on both the right-down line 623 and the V-shaped line 624a is selected. Similarly, when a symbol that may become a winning combination symbol stops at the lower position of the left reel 301a, the corresponding winnings of the remaining reels 301b and 301c are added to both the right-up line 623a and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. One of the reel stop control tables capable of aligning the role symbols will be selected.

  That is, in the “forward push” stop operation procedure, only the left reel 301a is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the upper position or the lower position, the corresponding winning combination is still in either of the two active lines. It is possible to align the symbols. Accordingly, at the stage of step S206, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). . At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made. That is, in step S201, if the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first (first) from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c along the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure, The determinations in steps S202 and S210 are not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S217. Step S217 and subsequent steps are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S217 and S218 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the right reel 301c (step S219). Then, the reel stop control table for the remaining left reel 301a and middle reel 301b is determined (step S221), and the first reel stop flag and the right reel stop flag RF are set to ON (steps S222 and S223).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S221, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the middle reel stop process (step S213) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b are pressed. Executed according to In the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, just as in the “forward push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and there is either winning symbol in the upper position or the lower position. In such a case, it is still possible to align the corresponding winning symbol in any of the two active lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  By the way, in the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore, description will be given below. That is, in step S201, if the middle reel stop button 211b is first depressed (first) in accordance with the “middle push” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the depression operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, The determination at S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S210. Steps S210 and thereafter are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S210 and S211 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the middle reel 301b (step S212). Then, the reel stop control tables for the remaining left reel 301a and right reel 301c are determined (step S214), and the first reel stop flag and the middle reel stop flag MF are set to ON (steps S215 and S216).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S216, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the right reel stop process (step S220) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 211a and the right reel stop button 211c are pressed. Executed according to Here, in the case of “middle press”, unlike the step S206 in the “forward press” (or step S221 in the “reverse press”), the corresponding winning symbol is still aligned on any of the four active lines at this point. It is possible. In other words, if the symbol at the middle position among the stops of the first stop reel (in this case, the middle reel 301b) is a symbol that may become the winning symbol, it is on the effective line based on that symbol. Then, the reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels (the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c) is selected.

  Specifically, for example, it is assumed that a symbol that may become a winning combination symbol is stopped at the middle position of the first stop reel (in this case, the middle reel 301b) in the symbol display window 591a. In this case, since all of the right-down line 623b, the right-up line 623a, the V-shaped line 624a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b have the middle stop position of the middle reel 301b as the effective stop position, The corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels 301a and 301c can be aligned. Therefore, in the case of “middle push”, the corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels 301b and 301c are aligned on any of the downward-right line 623b, the V-shaped line 624a, the upward-right line 623a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. One of the possible reel stop control tables is selected.

  That is, in the “middle push” stop operation procedure, when only the middle reel 301b is in a stopped state and there is a winning combination symbol at the middle position, it is still possible to align the corresponding winning symbol on any of the four active lines. is there. Therefore, at the stage of step S216, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control is performed for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 591a as much as possible (so-called pull-in control, with a predetermined number of frames as the upper limit). Drawing in). Specifically, for example, three frames are determined in advance as a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 591a (hereinafter referred to as a pull-in controllable range) when a reel stop operation by the player is accepted. If there is a corresponding winning symbol within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 591a and stop the reel. Here, the “pull-in controllable range” refers to the maximum number of frames that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. For example, if the retractable range is a maximum of 3 frames, it is possible to display up to the third symbol in the reel rotation direction from the position when the reel stop operation is accepted at a predetermined position (for example, middle stage). It becomes. That is, it is possible to draw a symbol in a range of less than 3 frames at maximum (more specifically, a range obtained by subtracting one step from 3 frames). Note that one frame is from one symbol to another symbol adjacent in the reel rotation direction.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 591a at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within a range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 591a and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 591a and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the winning combination other than the bonus (BB, RB) and the cherry is the establishment flag, the corresponding winning symbol can be surely arranged without requiring the player's attention. This is because at least one winning symbol corresponding to each of the bell, watermelon, and replay is arranged within the pull-in controllable range. Note that bonus bonus combinations can also be arranged without needing to be viewed.

  Here, the reel stop control of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c when each reel stop button 211a-211c is operated will be described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, 14 symbols are written on each reel band 351a, 351b, 351c, and symbol drawing control is performed with the upper limit being 3 symbols.

  As described above, five types of symbols are written on the reel band 351a, and the position on the effective line in the left reel 301a is, as described above, of the upper, middle, and lower levels displayed in the symbol display window 591a. Upper and lower stages. Here, since there are two frames between the upper stage and the lower stage, it is possible to perform pull-in control with respect to a symbol written in an arbitrary five-frame range, no matter what eye-pushing operation is performed. That is, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written on the reel band 351a every five frames. 63, S man, M child, E man and H man are written in an arbitrary 5 frame range (that is, no matter which 5 frames are seen, S man, M child , E man and H man are shown). As a result, no matter what the player pushes, the S man, M child, E man and H man are stopped at the position (upper or lower) on the effective line by the pull-in control. For red 7, when the symbol No. 11 to 14 is positioned on the effective line and the eye is pressed, it stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID No. 1 or 2 is in the lower row). (If you push your eyes when you are positioned, Red 7 can stop at the top).

  In addition, four types of symbols are written on the reel band 351b, and the position on the effective line in the middle reel 301b is, as described above, only the middle level among the upper, middle, and lower levels displayed in the symbol display window 591a. It is. Therefore, with respect to the symbols written in the range of arbitrary three frames, the pull-in control can be performed no matter what the pushing operation is performed. That is, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written in every three frames on the reel band 351b. Therefore, looking at FIG. 63, the I man and the T child are written in the range of arbitrary three frames (that is, the I man and the T child are written in any three frames). . As a result, no matter what the player presses, the I man and the T child are stopped at the position (middle stage) on the effective line by the pull-in control. In addition, about red 7, it stops in a middle stage only when pushing down operation when the design of sequence number 11-14 is located in a middle stage. In addition, as for M man, when the eye-pushing operation is performed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 12 to 14 and SEQ ID NO: 1 are located in the middle stage, they do not stop in the middle stage. Therefore, even if the cherry is selected, if the player performs a pressing operation when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 12 to 14 and SEQ ID NO: 1 are located in the middle stage, the cherry symbols are not aligned (so-called “missing out” ) And 12 medals that should be paid out are not paid out if the cherry symbols are available.

  In addition, six types of symbols are written on the reel band 351c, and the position on the effective line on the right reel 301c is, as described above, the upper, middle, and lower of the upper, middle, and lower displayed on the symbol display window 591a. The bottom row. Here, since there are two frames between the upper stage and the lower stage, it is possible to perform pull-in control with respect to a symbol written in an arbitrary five-frame range, no matter what eye-push operation is performed. That is, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written on the reel band 351c every five frames. Therefore, looking at FIG. 63, E man, M child and H man are written within an arbitrary range of 5 frames (that is, E man, M child and H man can be seen in any 5 frames). Is written). As a result, no matter what the player pushes, the E male, M child, and H male are stopped at the position (upper or lower) on the active line by the pull-in control. On the other hand, when red 7 is pressed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 11 to 14 are located on the effective line, it stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID NO: 1 or 2 is in the lower row). (If you push your eyes when you are positioned, Red 7 can stop at the top). In addition, when white 7 is pressed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 2 to 5 are located on the effective line, the white 7 stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID NO: 6 or 7 is in the lower row). In the case where the user presses the eye when it is positioned, the white 7 can stop at the upper stage). Furthermore, for male S, when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 11 and 12 are pressed when the symbols are located in the upper stage, they do not stop at the position on the effective line. However, as described above, even if S male wins one of the small roles, it does not correspond to the combination symbol constituting the small role as the winning role, and when the winning role is a replay It does not correspond to a combination. Therefore, even if the S man is not necessarily written in the range of any five frames, the winning replay or the winning small role is not missed.

  Thus, of the replays and small roles, only the cherry may be missed even though they are elected. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning value per single winning of cherries that may be missed is eliminated, and the winning combination is always overlapped with other roles. For example, referring to FIG. 69 (a), the extracted random values 4000 to 4099 are shared winning values for cherry and watermelon, and the extracted random values 6926 to 6965 are shared winning values for cherry, watermelon and BB. The extracted random number 6979 is a value for winning a shared prize among the cherry, watermelon, and RB. As a result, even if a cherry is won and the cherry tree is missed due to a missed push operation, the other winning combination is stopped on the active line and the other winning winning symbol Will be complete.

  Here, among the symbols written on the reel bands 351a, 351b, 351c, the symbols that can be pulled in are as follows.

  When there are a plurality of positions on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 591a, the maximum number of frames between one position on the effective line and the other position is M (when there is one position on the effective line). Is M = 0), and if the number of frames that can be pulled in is N, symbols can be drawn up to (N + M) frames from the position of the reel bands 351a, 351b, 351c when the stop operation is performed. Here, the “maximum number of frames” is 2 frames when both the upper stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line (2 frames even if the middle stage is located on the effective line), and the upper and middle stages are effective. If it is located on the line, it is one frame. Similarly, when the middle stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line, one frame is provided.

  When the number of symbols displayed on the reel band is greater than the number N of frames that can be pulled in, it is impossible to pull in all symbols, and there are at least two symbols that can be missed. For example, in the case of the middle reel band 351b of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least three frames (sequence numbers 9 to 11, 10) in which red 7 is displayed as long as the I man and the T child are always drawable. ~ 12 or 11-13) M man can not be represented, and similarly, at least 3 frames (for example, SEQ ID NOs: 6-8, 7-9, 8-10) in which M man is represented This is because red 7 cannot be written inside.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small combination (cherry) with the largest payout is regarded as a small combination (a small combination that may be missed) that is not always drawn in even if it is elected. Yes. That is, there is a place (sequence number 9-11, 10-12, or 11-13) where the symbol (M male) corresponding to the small part (cherry) with the largest payout is not written within the range of any three frames. In other words, the symbol (M male) corresponding to the small payout (cherry) with the largest payout is written on the middle reel band 351b beyond the range of the number of frames that can be pulled in.

  In this way, to provide a gaming machine that is supported by everyone by making the winning value shared by the small role (cherry) that can be missed and the replay and small role (bell, watermelon) that can always be pulled in and controlled. Is possible. In other words, if you are a player who has the skill that you can always push without losing when you win the cherry, you can enjoy the most medal payouts in small roles by aligning the cherry pattern, so you can get a sense of superiority It becomes possible. Also, even if you are a player who can't always hold cherry, you won't be able to pay out medals because Cherry wins multiple other small roles that can't always be missed. When the other small role symbols are arranged, the medal can be paid out and the loss feeling given to the player can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is supported by both a player with a high level of skill and a player with a low level of skill. Furthermore, even if the player misses the cherry when winning the cherry, fewer medals will be paid out than the number of medals (12) that will be paid out when the cherry symbols are aligned. Don't be. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the player and the hall.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the value for winning the shared winning between replay and all the small roles and BB or RB is set, even if the replay symbols or any of the small role symbols are arranged, the BB game or An RB game may be played. Thereby, the player has a sense of expectation that the winning combination with BB or RB may be won every time the small role symbols are arranged, and the game can be reduced from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the winning value shared with all the small roles and BB or RB is set, if the extracted random number value is the winning value shared with BB or RB, the BB symbol or RB will fail. Even if the symbols cannot be arranged, it is possible to avoid the situation where medals are wasted in vain because the winning small symbols are duplicated.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of overlapping winning with BB or RB increases as the number of medals paid out (acquired number) when the small roles are aligned increases. This is shown in FIG. 69 (a). Will be described with reference to FIG.

  Replay (replay 1 and replay 2) single win value per share is 2400, BB and RB do not overlap and other wins overlap is 0, BB or RB share win value Is four. Therefore, when the replay is won, the BB or RB is won with a probability of approximately 1/601.

  Bells (Bell 1 and Bell 2) have a single winning value of 4200, and do not overlap with BB and RB, and do not overlap with other small roles. The number of shared winnings is 0, the value per shared winning with BB or RB The number of is 16. Therefore, when the bell is won, the BB or RB is won with a probability of approximately 1/263. The bell is the main small role having the highest appearance rate. When the bell symbols are arranged, five medals are paid out. Here, the “appearance rate” is the frequency of alignment on the effective line (the same applies hereinafter in this specification).

  The number of watermelon single wins is 200, the number per share win that does not overlap with BB and RB and overlaps with other small roles (cherries) is 100, and the number per share win with BB or RB is 41 It is. Therefore, when you win a watermelon, you will win BB or RB with a probability of approximately 1/7. The watermelon appearance rate is extremely lower than the bell appearance rate, and the watermelon appearance rate in this embodiment is approximately one-twelfth of the bell appearance rate. Also, when the watermelon symbols are ready, 9 medals are paid out.

  The number of single winnings per cherry is zero, the number per shared winning that does not overlap with BB and RB and overlaps with other small roles (watermelon) is 100, and the number per shared winning with BB or RB is 41 It is. Therefore, when winning cherry, BB or RB is won with a probability of about 3.4. Cherry is a rare role with the lowest appearance rate. Moreover, as described above, even if the cherry is won, it may be missed, so the appearance rate of the cherry is lower than the winning probability of the cherry. When the cherry symbols are arranged, 12 medals are paid out.

  In this way, when a small role is won, a small role with a low appearance rate has a higher expectation that the winning combination overlaps with BB or RB, while the small role has a high appearance rate. Even if it does not exclude duplicate winning with BB or RB. This ensures that the player always has a sense of expectation due to the fact that the small role symbols are aligned, and that the expectation varies depending on the aligned small role symbols. I will be angry. In addition, the rare small role (cherry) that has the highest probability of being duplicated with BB or RB may be missed, and even if it is missed, other winning roles (watermelon if small role) can be arranged. . As a result, even if the rare small role symbol that has the highest probability of being won simultaneously with BB or RB is not available, the player must play the game while thinking, “Did you miss the rare small role symbol?” As a result, the game is played with a sense of expectation that "Is it actually a duplicate of BB or RB?" Thereby, it becomes possible to give a player a sense of expectation, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the replay symbols or small role symbols are complete, the more the number of medals paid out, the higher the expectation that the BB or RB will be won, so combined with the joy of winning many medals, Furthermore, the expectation of the BB game or the RB game that can acquire more medals increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the case of a winning combination of a winning value shared by a BB symbol (or RB symbol) and a small role, the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is preferentially drawn. However, since the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is a symbol that needs to be pressed, when the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is not retractable (when it is outside the retractable control range), the other winning symbol Shall be drawn in. And as already demonstrated, it becomes possible at this time to arrange the other winning combination symbols without missing them. Accordingly, when the winning combination of the value per shared winning is applicable, either the BB symbol or the other winning combination (small role) symbol can always be aligned. In addition, the priority order of the symbols drawn preferentially is the order of the replay symbol, BB symbol (or RB symbol), and small role symbol. The pull-in control of the value for shared winning will be described in detail separately.

  From the above, in the slot machine 1, winning symbols other than the bonus symbol (BB symbol, RB symbol) and cherry symbol can be aligned without requiring a selection. In other words, the winning combination other than the bonus (BB, RB) and cherry will not cause “missing”. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible that the difference in profits between players is increased due to the difference in skill (for example, a large difference in the number of medals obtained).

[Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are arranged on any active line in the symbol display window 591a (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 72, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are arranged on any of the active lines from the stop eye mode in the symbol display window 591a (corresponding to the winning combination). It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301 and S303, it is determined whether an RB game is being played or a BB game is being played. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of game state flags, which will be described later, an RB game flag and a BB game flag.

  If the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S303 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301 and S303 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, after executing the RT game end determination process (details will be described later), the following steps S320, S330, S340, S350, S360 are further performed according to the winning combination symbols arranged on any active line. Move on to either.

  In step S320, it is determined whether BB symbols are available. When the BB symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S322.

  In the next step S322, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games where medals can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether RB symbols are available. When the RB symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S332.

  In the next step S332, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as an RB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained according to the BB game is performed (details will be described later).

  In the next step S340, it is determined whether or not the replay symbols are ready. If the replay symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342. In the present embodiment, in step S340, one of the replay 1 symbol ("H male symbol-I male symbol-H male symbol") and replay 2 symbol ("H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol") is selected. If they are aligned, it is determined that the replay symbols are aligned.

  In the next step S342, a replay game process is executed. In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the main control board 409 (main control MPU) in order to start the next game with the same bet number (in this example, MAX bet) as the bet number in the game. Let Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  Then, after executing the RT game demotion determination process (details will be described later) in step S344, in step S346, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) and the process ends. Specifically, as a single winning combination, if Replay 1 is won, the Replay 1 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0), and if Replay 2 is won, the Replay 2 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). ).

  If the winning combination for replay and bonus (replay 1, 2 + BB, RB) is won and it is determined in step S340 that the replay symbols are aligned, the replay winning flag is OFF (step S356). However, the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is not turned off (= 0) but is carried on from the next game on (= 1).

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small role symbols are available. If the small role symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S352. In this embodiment, in step S350, a bell 1 symbol ("M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol"), a bell 2 symbol ("M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol"), a watermelon symbol ( When any one of “E male symbol-I male symbol-E male symbol”) and cherry symbol (“ANY-M male symbol-ANY”) is aligned, it is determined that the small role symbols are aligned.

  In the next step S352, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out.

  Then, after executing the RT game promotion determination process (details will be described later) in step S354, in step S356, the corresponding small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) and the process ends. Specifically, as a single winning role, if the player has won the bell 1, the bell 1 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0), and if the player has won the bell 2, the bell 2 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If the watermelon is won, the watermelon winning flag is turned off (= 0), and if the cherry is won, the cherry winning flag is turned off (= 0).

  If the single winning combination (cherry + watermelon) of the small roles is won, it is determined in step S350 that only one of the cherry symbols and the watermelon symbols is complete, but step S356. In, both the cherry winning flag and the watermelon winning flag are set to OFF (= 0) regardless of which symbols are arranged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shared winning combination of the small role and bonus (small role + BB, RB) is won and it is determined in step S350 that the small role symbols are aligned, the winning flag for the small role is determined in step S366. Is turned off (= 0), but the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is not turned off (= 0) but is carried on from the next game on (= 1).

  Next, when none of the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, none of the above determinations in steps S320, S330, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a losing process is executed. In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Therefore, if the winning flag does not correspond to either the BB flag or the RB flag, “missing” is determined at this point. It should be noted that there is a possibility that “missing” may occur only in the cherry as a single winning combination, but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is no cherry as a single winning combination, and all the cherries are small. It is a shared winning role with a role (watermelon). In other words, when you win a cherry, you must win a watermelon that is a small role without “missing” (details will be described later). For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the cherry is missed, the watermelons are always prepared, so that there is no winning combination that causes “missing”.

  Further, when the winning flag corresponds to either the BB flag or the RB flag, the winning flag is not turned OFF and is carried over after the next game. As a result, the winning flag is carried over until the corresponding winning combination symbols can be aligned without causing any loss of BB and RB. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of security that BB and RB game benefits can be obtained without worrying about losing a winning role with higher profitability than other winning roles such as BB and RB. You can face it. In particular, for a player with a low level of skill, the practice of pressing can be repeated any number of times until the BB symbols (or RB symbols) are aligned.

  The processing from step S310 to step S360 described above is processing executed in the case of a normal game or an RT game. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the case of a BB game and an RB game.

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are available. The “BB game payout” here is a collective term for a winning combination in which a medal is paid out during a BB game including a bonus game exclusive role in addition to a bell, watermelon, and cherry. Then, when the BB game payout symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the BB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Subsequent to step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S376, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process moves to step 378, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). In the present embodiment, no miss-out occurs, and therefore the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available. This “RB game payout” is also a collective term for the winning roles that have been paid out during the RB game in the same way as the above-mentioned BB game payout (in this case, a dedicated role for bell, watermelon, cherry, bonus game) Is applicable). If there are RB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the RB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S386, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this was demonstrated previously, description is abbreviate | omitted.

[BB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 72 is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. The BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the BB game is started with the same 3 betting (three) as in the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the BB symbols are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[BB game end determination process]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S372 of FIG. 72 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  In step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 400. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, where the cumulative payout number during the BB game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this). If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, after the BB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the third RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S462, and the process is ended.

[RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S330 of FIG. 72 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. This RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. In step S506, the cumulative payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with the same 3 bet (three) as in the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[RB game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the RB game end determination process in step S384 of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of medals in step S382 of FIG. 72 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  Next, in step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number exceeds 20. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S554 to display the cumulative payout number in the RB game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, after the RB game flag is turned off (= 0), the fourth RT game start flag is turned on (= 1) in step S558, and the process is ended.

[RT demotion determination processing]
The RT demotion determination process in step S344 of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether either the BB flag or the RB flag is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in the game,
-Bonus symbols (BB, RB) and replay (Replay 1, Replay 2) are selected for the winning combination and replay symbols (Replay 1 symbol, Replay 2 symbols) are available instead of bonus symbols (BB symbol, RB symbol) Case-With the bonus flag (BB, RB) set to ON (= 1), the player is elected to the single winning role of replay (Replay 1, Replay 2) and replay symbols (Replay 1 symbol, Replay 2 symbols) One of the cases where is complete corresponds.

  Then, when the determination in step S601 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, the fifth RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S601 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S605, and it is determined whether the replay 2 symbols are prepared. That is, when it is determined in step S340 that the replay symbols are prepared, it is determined whether the replay symbol is the replay 2 symbol ("H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol"). If the replay 2 symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S607.

  In step S607, it is determined whether the normal game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the normal game. If the determination in step S607 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S609 whether the third RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the third RT game. If the determination in step S609 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S611 whether the fourth RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the fourth RT game. If the determination in step S611 is not satisfied, that is, if the gaming state is not any of the base game, the third RT game, and the fourth RT game, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination is satisfied in any of steps S607, S609, and S611, that is, if the gaming state is controlled by any of the normal game, the third RT game, and the fourth RT game, the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, the first RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed. Note that in the fourth RT game, there is no single winning value for Replay 2, so it is not possible that YES in S605 and YES in S611. That is, NO is always determined in S611. However, in this embodiment, there is no single winning value for Replay 2 in the fourth RT game, but it may be configured to be able to win Replay 2 with a very low probability.

[RT promotion judgment processing]
The RT promotion determination process in step S354 in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether either the BB flag or the RB flag is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in the game,
-Bonus (BB, RB) and small role (Bell 1, Bell 2, watermelon, cherry) won the shared winning role, not a bonus symbol (BB symbol, RB symbol), small role symbol (Bell 1 symbol, Bell) When 2 symbols, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol) are complete ・ In the state where the bonus flag (BB, RB) is carried on with ON (= 1), the small role (bell 1, bell 2, watermelon, cherry) alone One of cases where a winning combination or a shared winning combination between small roles (watermelon + cherry) is won and a small winning symbol (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol) is arranged.

  Then, when the determination in step S701 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, the fifth RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S715, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S701 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S705, where it is determined whether the bell 2 symbols are aligned. That is, when it is determined in the above-described step S350 that the small role symbols are prepared, it is determined whether or not the small role symbol is the bell 2 symbol ("M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol"). If the bell 2 symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S707.

  In step S707, it is determined whether the normal game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the normal game. If the determination in step S707 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S709 whether the third RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the third RT game. If the determination in step S709 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S711 whether the fourth RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the fourth RT game. If the determination in step S711 is not satisfied, that is, if the gaming state is not any of the base game, the third RT game, and the fourth RT game, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination is satisfied in any of steps S707, S709, and S711, that is, if the gaming state is controlled to one of the normal game, the third RT game, and the fourth RT game, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the second RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S715, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

[RT game start processing]
The RT game start process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This RT game start process is executed in steps S376 and S386 in the determination process in FIG. 72, step S615 in the RT demotion determination process in FIG. 77, and step S715 in the RT promotion determination process in FIG. Note that this RT game start process is executed in the same manner in any of steps S376, S386, S615, and S715.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the first RT game start flag is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in step S803, the first RT game number is set to “400 times”. In the next step S805, the first RT game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the first RT game start flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. As a result, the first RT game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S801 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S807, and it is determined whether the second RT game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, in step S809, the second RT game number is set to "50 times". In the next step S811, the second RT game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the second RT game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the second RT game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S807 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S813, and it is determined whether the third RT game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, in step S815, the third RT game number is set to “6000 times”. In the next step S817, the third RT game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the third RT game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the third RT game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S813 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S819 to determine whether the fourth RT game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, in step S821, the fourth RT game number is set to “50 times”. In the next step S821, the fourth RT game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the fourth RT game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the 4th RT game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S819 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S825 to determine whether the fifth RT game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, in the next step S827, the fifth RT game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the fifth RT game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the fifth RT game is started from the next game. Note that the number of fifth RT games is not set for the fifth RT game, unlike other RT games. Therefore, the fifth RT game is continuously executed regardless of the number of RT games as long as the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is carried over internally.

  If none of the determinations in steps S801, S807, S813, S819, and S825 is satisfied, the process ends without performing any process.

[RT game end determination processing]
Next, the RT game end determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the determination process of FIG. 72 described above, when neither determination of steps S301 and S303 is satisfied, this RT game end determination process is executed.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the first RT game flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S901 is satisfied, in the next step S903, the first RT game number is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, it is determined whether the remaining number of first RT games is “0”. If the first RT game number is “0”, the determination in S905 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S909, and the first RT game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the first RT game ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S905 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S907, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the first RT game.

  When the determination in step S907 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S909, and the first RT game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the first RT game ends. The processing here indicates that the first RT game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  If the determinations in steps S905 and S907 are not satisfied, the end condition for the first RT game is not satisfied, so this process ends and the first RT game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination in step S901 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether the second RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). Then, when the determination in step S911 is satisfied, in the next step S913, the second RT game number is subtracted by “1” and the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S915, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of second RT games is “0”. If the second RT game number is “0”, the determination in S915 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S919, and the second RT game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the second RT game is ended.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S915 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S917, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the second RT game.

  When the determination in step S917 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S919, and the second RT game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the second RT game is ended. The processing here indicates that the second RT game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Note that if the determinations in steps S915 and S917 are not satisfied, the second RT game end condition is not satisfied, so this process ends and the second RT game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination in step S911 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S921, and it is determined whether the third RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S921 is satisfied, in the next step S923, the third RT game number is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S925.

  In step S925, it is determined whether the remaining number of third RT games is “0”. If the third RT game number is “0”, the determination in S925 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S931, and the third RT game flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third RT game is ended.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S925 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S927, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the third RT game.

  When the determination in step S927 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S931, and the third RT game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third RT game is ended. The process here indicates that the third RT game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Further, if the determination in step S927 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S929, and it is determined whether either the bell 2 symbol or the replay 2 symbol is present. The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to the case where either the bell 2 or the replay 2 is won and either the bell 2 symbol or the replay 2 symbol is aligned in the symbol display window 591a in the third RT game. To do.

  When the determination in step S929 is satisfied, the process moves to step S931, and the third RT game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third RT game is ended. The processing here indicates that the 3rd RT game has transitioned to another RT state (promotion to RT2 or demote to RT1) and ended when the Bell 2 symbol and the Replay 2 symbol have been prepared. .

  If the determinations in steps S925, S927, and S929 are not satisfied, the condition for ending the third RT game is not satisfied. Therefore, the process is ended as it is and the third RT game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination in step S921 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S933, and it is determined whether the fourth RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S933 is satisfied, in the next step S935, the fourth RT game number is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S937.

  In step S937, it is determined whether the remaining number of fourth RT games is “0”. If the fourth RT game number is “0”, the determination in S937 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S943, and the fourth RT game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth RT game is ended.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S937 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S939, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the fourth RT game.

  When the determination in step S939 is satisfied, the process moves to step S943, and the fourth RT game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth RT game is ended. The processing here indicates that the fourth RT game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Further, if the determination in step S939 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S941, and it is determined whether either the bell 2 symbol or the replay 2 symbol is present. The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to the case where either the bell 2 or the replay 2 is won and either the bell 2 symbol or the replay 2 symbol is aligned in the symbol display window 591a in the fourth RT game. To do.

  If the determination in step S941 is satisfied, the process moves to step S943, and the fourth RT game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth RT game is ended. The processing here is that when the Bell 2 symbol and the Replay 2 symbol are aligned, the gaming state shifts to another RT state (promotion to RT2 or demotion to RT1) and the fourth RT game ends. Show.

  If the determinations in steps S937, S939, and S941 are not satisfied, the condition for ending the fourth RT game is not satisfied. Therefore, this process ends and the fourth RT game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination of step S933 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S945, and it is determined whether the fifth RT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S945 is satisfied, in next step S947, it is determined whether any of the BB symbol and the RB symbol (that is, the bonus symbol) is available. When this determination is satisfied, either the BB symbol or the RB symbol is displayed on the symbol display window 591a based on the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) carried over internally in the fifth RT game. This is the case when they are complete.

  When the determination in step S947 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S949, and the fifth RT game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). As a result, the fifth RT game ends. The processing here indicates that the gaming state shifts to the bonus game (BB game, RB game) and the fifth RT game is ended when the BB symbol and the RB symbol are aligned by the player's aspiration and the like. ing.

  If none of the determinations in steps S901, S911, S921, S933, and S945 is satisfied, the process ends without performing any process. Specifically, when the game state is controlled by a normal game, the normal game flag is ON (= 1) and the first to fifth RT flags are OFF (= 0). None of the determinations in steps S901, S911, S921, S933, and S945 is satisfied, and the process is terminated and the normal game is continued.

[Conditions and conditions for transition to each RT game]
Here, the transition condition to each RT game and the termination condition of each RT game will be described. As described above, the RT games include a first RT game, a second RT game, a third RT game, a fourth RT game, and a fifth RT game. Then, any RT game among the first RT game to the fifth RT game is performed unless the normal game or the bonus game (BB, RB) is being played.

  The transition condition to the first RT game is to win Replay 2 in the normal state (replay 2 symbols are aligned), or to win Replay 2 when the third RT game is being played (Replay 2 patterns are aligned). In addition, the first RT game end condition is that 400 games are played in the first RT game, or BB or RB is won (the BB symbol or RB symbol is not required, and the BB or RB flag is set). It only has to be ON). After 400 games are played without winning either BB or RB in the first RT game, the game is in a normal state.

  The transition condition to the second RT game is that the player wins the bell 2 in the normal state (being the bell 2 symbols), or the player wins the bell 2 when the third RT game or the fourth RT game is being played. It is to do (become Bell 2 symbols). In addition, the second RT game end condition is that 50 games are played in the second RT game, or that BB or RB is won (the BB symbol or RB symbol is not required, and the BB or RB flag is set). It only has to be ON). In this second RT game, after 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB, the normal state is entered.

  The transition condition to the third RT game is that the BB game is finished. That is, as described above, after the BB game is finished, the process always shifts to the third RT game. The end condition of the third RT game is that the 6000 game is played in the third RT game, the transition condition to the first RT game is satisfied (winning the replay 2), and the transition condition to the second RT game is satisfied. Doing (winning bell 2), winning BB or RB (BB symbols or RB symbols do not need to be aligned, and the BB or RB flag only has to be ON). In this third RT game, after 6000 games were played without winning either BB or RB, and further, neither the transition condition to the first RT game nor the transition condition to the second RT game was satisfied. It becomes a normal state.

  The transition condition to the fourth RT game is that the RB game ends. That is, as described above, after the RB game ends, the process always shifts to the fourth RT game. The end condition for the fourth RT game is that 50 games are played in the fourth RT game, the transition condition to the first RT game is satisfied (winning the replay 2), and the transition condition to the second RT game is satisfied. Doing (winning bell 2), winning BB or RB (BB symbols or RB symbols do not need to be aligned, and the BB or RB flag only has to be ON). In this fourth RT game, after winning 50 games without winning either BB or RB, and without satisfying any of the transition conditions to the first RT game and the transition conditions to the second RT game, It becomes a normal state.

  The transition condition to the fifth RT game is whether the RT game is being performed, whether it is the normal state or not, and when the RT game is being performed, which RT game is being performed among the first RT game to the fourth RT game. Regardless, it is to win BB or RB (the BB symbol or RB symbol does not have to be aligned, and the BB or RB flag only has to be ON). In addition, the ending condition of the fifth RT game is to win BB or RB (the BB symbol or RB symbol does not need to be aligned, and the BB or RB flag may be turned ON). That is, the 5th RT game is a privilege that is given after winning BB or RB (after the BB flag or RB flag is turned on) until the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned.

  However, when the replay 2 symbols are aligned and shifted to the first RT game, even if the bell 2 symbols are aligned in the first RT game, the transition to the second RT game is not performed. Similarly, when the bell 2 symbols are aligned and a transition is made to the second RT game, even if the replays 2 are aligned in the second RT game, the transition to the first RT game is not made.

[Each RT game / Normal game]
Next, each RT game and normal game will be described. However, since the third RT game is performed after the BB game is ended, and the fourth RT game is performed after the RB game is ended, for convenience of explaining the flow of the game, the third RT game, the fourth RT game, the normal game, The first RT game, the second RT game, and the fifth RT game will be described in this order.

[3rd RT game]
As described above, the third RT game is played after the end of the BB game.

  In this third RT game, the winning probability of Replay 2 is approximately 1/18, and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/41. That is, the probability of shifting to the first RT game is higher than the probability of shifting to the second RT game.

  In this third RT game, the winning probability of Replay 1 is approximately 1 / 3.5, and the winning probability of Bell 1 is approximately 1 / 4.3. However, since winning the replay 1 is not a condition for ending the third RT game (that is, no transition is made to another RT game), even if the replay 1 is won, the third RT game is continued. Similarly, winning for Bell 1 is not a condition for ending the third RT game, and therefore, even if Bell 1 is won, the third RT game is continued.

  When the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won and the bell 1 symbol or the bell 2 symbol is aligned on the effective line, the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 does not distinguish between the bell 1 and the bell 2. A picture reminiscent of a simple bell is displayed. As a result, it is difficult to know from the display of the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. In addition, even if one of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of medals to be paid out is the same as five. Therefore, which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? It cannot be determined from the number of medals paid out. As a result, if the player wins the bell when the third RT game is being played, the player will have a sense of expectation that the player may move to the second RT game. In addition, when winning a bell 1 or a bell 2, it is difficult to know which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, so is the player a bell transitioning to the second RT game? There is also the fun of predicting whether or not.

  Similarly, when the replay 1 or the replay 2 is won and the replay 1 symbol or the replay 2 symbol is aligned on the active line, the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 distinguishes the replay 1 and the replay 2 from each other. A picture reminiscent of simple replay is displayed. Thereby, it is difficult to grasp from the display of the image display body 500 which of the replay 1 and the replay 2 is won. Furthermore, since it is the same in the point which can be replayed even if it is a case where either replay is elected among the replay 1 and the replay 2, it understands further about which replay was won among the replay 1 and the replay 2. It has become difficult. As a result, if the replay is won while the third RT game is being played, the player has a desire not to move to the first RT game. In addition, when replay 1 or replay 2 is won, it is difficult to know which replay is won among replay 1 and replay 2, so is the player replaying the first RT game? There is also the fun of predicting whether or not.

  By the way, the combined probability of Replay 1 and Replay 2 is approximately one third, and the combined probability of Bell 1 and Bell 2 is approximately 3.9. That is, in the third RT game, the winning probability of Replay 2 is more than twice as high as the winning probability of Bell 2 (the transition probability to the first RT game is more than twice as high as the transition probability to the second RT game) Nevertheless, the frequency with which the replay symbols are aligned on the effective line is not significantly different from the frequency with which the bell symbols are aligned on the effective line. Note that “not much difference” means that the player cannot grasp if the appearance frequency of the replay is extremely higher than the appearance frequency of the bell. Specifically, the frequency at which the replay symbols are aligned on the active line (replay 1 or The probability that the replay 2 is won) is preferably 1.5 times or less the frequency that the bell symbols are aligned on the active line (the probability of winning the bell 1 or the bell 2).

  Note that if 6000 games are played without winning either Replay 2 or Bell 2, the normal state is reached, but it is extremely rare that 6000 games are played without winning either Replay 2 or Bell 2.

  As described above, after the BB game is ended, the third RT game in which the decrease in medals held by the player is suppressed is performed. On the other hand, depending on the winning combination, the second RT game is more advantageous to the player than the third RT game. Alternatively, the first RT game can be shifted to the player, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the third RT game. Therefore, there is no need to simply wait for the end of the third RT game (simply digest the predetermined game), the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the conventional slot machine, a picture reminding the winning combination is attached to each reel band as a symbol corresponding to the winning combination so that the winning combination can be grasped at a glance. For example, a symbol such as replay (RP), a bell, or a watermelon was drawn on each reel band. In other words, if, for example, bells are aligned on the effective line when all reels are stopped, it can be determined that the bell has been won.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbols attached to the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c are not pictures that evoke the winning combination alone. In other words, the winning combination cannot be grasped only by stopping one reel or two reels, and the winning combination can be grasped only when all reels are stopped.

  As described above, when the replay 1 is won, the combination pattern of the symbols on the effective line when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped is “H male symbol-I male symbol”. -H male design ".

  In addition, when Replay 2 is won, the combination pattern of the symbols on the effective line when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped is “H man symbol-T child symbol-H man”. "Design".

  Further, when winning the bell 1, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped, the symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol”. "

  Further, when winning the bell 2, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped, the symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol”. "

  Therefore, when the player operates “Middle reel stop button 211b” among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time and “I male symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is elected to Replay 1 or Bell 2. There is a possibility. When the third RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Replay 1, the third RT game is continued without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the player Shifts to a second RT game that is advantageous to the player in that the medals held by the player increase.

  Also, if the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211, for example, and the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is elected to replay 2 or the bell 1 There is a possibility. When the third RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the third RT game is continued without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Replay 2, the player Shifts to the first RT game, which is disadvantageous for the player in that the medal held by the player is reduced rapidly. It should be noted that the first RT game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or an RT game more advantageous than the first RT game unless 400 games are played or BB or RB is won.

  As described above, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time when the third RT game is being performed, the player is determined depending on the symbol stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. Will be anxious. Specifically, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time and the “I male symbol” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is expected to enter the second RT game. While feeling a sense, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the first RT game, and the player is relieved. Further, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 to stop the “T child symbol” in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the game shifts to the second RT game. Since it is decided not to do so, there is still a possibility of shifting to the first RT game. In other words, the symbol “I male symbol” drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may shift to the second RT game but does not shift to the first RT game, and is drawn on the middle reel 301b. The symbol “T child symbol” that is displayed functions as an out symbol that may shift to the first RT game despite the possibility of shifting to the second RT game. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the player selects “H” on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that Replay 1 or Replay 2 is won. When the third RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Replay 1, the third RT game is continued without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Replay 2, the player Shifts to the first RT game, which is disadvantageous for the player in that the medal held by the player is reduced rapidly. It should be noted that the first RT game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or an RT game more advantageous than the first RT game unless 400 games are played or BB or RB is won.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211 and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, “M” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “child symbol” stops, there is a possibility that the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won. When the third RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the third RT game is continued without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the player Shifts to a second RT game that is advantageous to the player in that the medals held by the player increase.

  As described above, when the third RT game is being performed, even when the player operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211 first, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, The player is relieved by the symbols stopped on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “H male symbol” stops, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the second RT game, but there is still a possibility to transfer to the first RT game. I wish. In other words, the “H male symbol” drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line may be transferred to the first RT game despite the possibility of shifting to the second RT game. The symbol “M child symbol”, which functions as a symbol and is drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line, may be transferred to the second RT game, but does not shift to the first RT game. Functions as a symbol. In addition, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, it cannot be grasped until all reels are stopped as to whether or not to shift to another RT game. Until the end of the game, the player cannot be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the third RT game is being performed, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, and each reel stop button. 211, for example, when the left reel stop button 211a is first operated and then the right reel stop button 211c is operated, every time the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, it is expected. A feeling of disappointment and a feeling of disappointment are mixed, and an innovative gaming machine that has never existed can be provided.

  It should be noted that when replay 2 is won in the third RT game, the first RT game is almost always transferred, but the first RT game is not always transferred. As can be seen from FIG. 69 (d), when the extracted random number value is 10175, replay 2 and BB are selected in duplicate, and when the extracted random number value is 10182, replay 2 and RB are selected. Will be won in duplicate.

  As described above, when winning the replay 2 in the third RT game is one of the conditions for shifting to the first RT game, when the replay 2 is won in the third RT game, the replay 2 is combined. BB or RB may be won (does not shift to the first RT game at this time). Thereby, even if it is a case where replay 2 is won in a 3rd RT game, a BB game or a RB game may be performed rarely, without shifting to a 1st RT game. Therefore, when winning the replay 2 in the 3rd RT game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by giving the player a slight sense of expectation winning the BB or RB.

  Similarly, although the transition to the second RT game is almost always made when winning the bell 2 in the third RT game, the transition to the second RT game is not always performed. As can be seen from FIG. 69 (d), when the extracted random number value is any one of 10166 to 10173, Bell 2 and BB are selected and the extracted random number value is 10180. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  As described above, when winning the bell 2 in the third RT game is one of the conditions for transitioning to the second RT game, when winning the bell 2 in the third RT game, BB or RB may be won (at this time, it does not shift to the second RT game). Thereby, even if it is a case where the bell 2 is won in the third RT game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the second RT game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more medals can be obtained in a shorter period than in the case where the second RT game is performed. Therefore, even if the player wins the bell 2 in the third RT game, disappointing the player Rather, a BB game or RB game that is more advantageous to the player than the second RT game is played. Thereby, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

[4th RT game]
As described above, the fourth RT game is played after the end of the RB game.

  In this fourth RT game, the probability per single winning of Replay 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB), and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/40. Therefore, since there is no probability of shifting to the first RT game, the player has a sense of expectation to shift to the second RT game. In particular, in the fourth RT game, there is no probability of shifting to the first RT game despite the fact that the player can play the game while substantially maintaining the amount of medals held by the player, and only the second RT game is transferred. Therefore, the player plays the game with the expectation of further stepping up to the second RT game, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this fourth RT game, the winning probability of Replay 1 is approximately 1.8 and the winning probability of Bell 1 is approximately 4.3. However, since winning the replay 1 is not a condition for ending the fourth RT game (that is, not shifting to another RT game), the fourth RT game is continuously performed even if the replay 1 is won. Similarly, winning for Bell 1 is not a condition for ending the fourth RT game, so that even if Bell 1 is won, the fourth RT game is continued.

  It should be noted that, when the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won, it cannot be determined from the display of the image display body 500 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. In addition, even if one of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of medals to be paid out is the same as five. Therefore, which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? It cannot be determined from the number of medals paid out. As a result, when the player wins the bell when the fourth RT game is being played, the player has a sense of expectation that the player may move to the second RT game. In addition, when winning a bell 1 or a bell 2, it is difficult to know which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, so is the player a bell transitioning to the second RT game? There is also the fun of predicting whether or not.

  On the other hand, regardless of whether Replay 1 or Replay 2 is won, the game does not shift to the first RT game, and the fourth RT game continues to be played unless other end conditions are satisfied. As a result, even if a picture reminiscent of replay is displayed on the effect display device 590 of the image display 500, the replay can be performed without worrying about shifting to the first RT game. That is, even if the Replay 1 symbol or the Replay 2 symbol is aligned when the 4RT game is being played, the Replay 1 symbol or the Replay 2 symbol is aligned when the 3RT game is being played, There is no need to worry about moving to the first RT game. In this way, when the replay 2 symbols are prepared, the profit given to the player can be provided regardless of whether the third RT game or the fourth RT game is performed, even though the same game (replay 2) is performed. It will be different.

  By the way, the winning probability of Replay 1 is approximately 1 / 1.8, whereas the combined probability of Bell 1 and Bell 2 is approximately 1 / 3.9. In the 3rd RT game, there was not much difference between the frequency at which the replay symbols are aligned on the effective line and the frequency at which the bell symbols are aligned on the effective line, but in this 4RT game, the frequency at which the replay symbols are aligned on the effective line. There is a slight difference between the frequency at which the bell symbols are aligned on the active line.

  If 50 games are played without winning either Replay 2 or Bell 2, the normal state is entered.

  In this way, in the fourth RT game to be played after the RB is finished, there is no possibility of shifting to the first RT game, and although the game can be performed with the expectation to shift to the second RT game, As described above, the probability of winning RB is extremely low compared to the probability of winning BB. Generally, a player is delighted to win a BB, but if he wins an RB, he is disappointed because the winning type is not BB even though he has won a lottery. Is discouraged because there are few). However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player is not discouraged as much as possible by making the RB winning probability extremely lower than the BB winning probability. In addition, when the RB is won, the fourth RT game that does not shift to the first RT game is performed thereafter, so even if the RB is won, the discouragement given to the player is negligible. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as in the case where the third RT game is being performed, when the replay 1 is won, the combination of symbols on the active line when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped. Becomes “H male design-I male design-H male design”.

  In addition, when Replay 2 is won, the combination pattern of the symbols on the effective line when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped is “H man symbol-T child symbol-H man”. "Design".

  Further, when winning the bell 1, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped, the symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol”. "

  Further, when winning the bell 2, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped, the symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol”. "

  Therefore, when the player operates “Middle reel stop button 211b” among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time and “I male symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is elected to Replay 1 or Bell 2. There is a possibility. When the fourth RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Replay 1, the third RT game is continued without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the player Shifts to a second RT game that is advantageous to the player in that the medals held by the player increase.

  Also, if the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211, for example, and the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is elected to replay 2 or the bell 1 There is a possibility. At this time, the fourth RT game is continuously performed without shifting to another RT game unless another end condition is satisfied.

  As described above, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time when the fourth RT game is being performed, the player is determined depending on the symbol stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. Will be anxious. Specifically, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 to stop the “I male symbol” in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is expected to enter the second RT game. You will have a feeling.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the player selects “H” on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that Replay 1 or Replay 2 is won. When the fourth RT game is being played, regardless of whether the winning combination is Replay 1 or Replay 2, the fourth RT game is continuously played without shifting to another RT game.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the player selects “H” on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, it may have won the bell 1 or the bell 2. When the fourth RT game is being played, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the fourth RT game is continuously performed without shifting to another RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the player Shifts to a second RT game that is advantageous to the player in that the medals held by the player increase.

  As described above, even when the player operates the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211 first, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c when the fourth RT game is being performed, The player is relieved by the symbols stopped on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “M child symbol” is stopped at the same time, a sense of expectation for shifting to the second RT game is held. In addition, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, it cannot be grasped until all reels are stopped as to whether or not to shift to another RT game. Until the end of the game, the player cannot be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the fourth RT game is being performed, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, and each reel stop button. 211, for example, when the left reel stop button 211a is first operated and then the right reel stop button 211c is operated, every time the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, it is expected. There is a possibility that a feeling is given, and it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine that has never existed.

  When replay 2 is won in the fourth RT game, as can be seen from FIG. 70 (a), when the extracted random number value is 13775, replay 2 and BB are won in duplicate, and the extracted random value Is 13782, replay 2 and RB are duplicated and won. On the other hand, the probability per single winning in Replay 2 is zero.

  In this way, in the fourth RT game, the probability per single winning of Replay 2 is zero, and since Replay 2 only wins overlapping with BB or RB, the probability that the Replay 2 symbols are aligned is extremely low. However, in the 4th RT game, when the replay 2 symbols are aligned, it will be won for BB or RB, so when the player has the replay 2 symbols that they think they should not align, It will not only give surprises to the elderly, but will also give great joy, and it can suppress the decline of interest.

  On the other hand, although it is almost always transferred to the second RT game when winning the bell 2 in the fourth RT game, it does not always shift to the second RT game. As can be seen from FIG. 70 (d), in the case where the extracted random number value is any one of 13766 to 13773, Bell 2 and BB are elected redundantly, and the extracted random number value is 13780. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  As described above, when winning the bell 2 in the fourth RT game is one of the conditions for shifting to the second RT game, when winning the bell 2 in the fourth RT game, BB or RB may be won (at this time, it does not shift to the second RT game). Thereby, even if it is a case where the bell 2 is won in the fourth RT game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the second RT game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more medals can be obtained in a shorter period than in the case where the second RT game is performed. Therefore, even if the player wins the bell 2 in the fourth RT game, disappointing the player Rather, a BB game or RB game that is more advantageous to the player than the second RT game is played. Thereby, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, regardless of whether BB or RB is won, after the end of the BB game and after the end of the RB, an RT game that can shift to the second RT game advantageous to the player is performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid quitting the game immediately after the BB game or RB game is finished, and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the third RT game played after the end of the BB game and the fourth RT game played after the end of the RB game have different advantages for the player in that the rate of decrease of medals held by the player is different. Yes. In this way, by performing an RT game that has a different degree of advantage for the player depending on the type of bonus game, it is possible to provide a slot machine in which the game after the bonus game is diversified and the player is less likely to get bored.

[Normal game]
The normal game is a game that is performed during a normal state in which the BB game and the RB game are not performed and any RT game is not performed.

  In this normal game, the winning probability of Replay 2 is approximately 1/13, and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/41. That is, the probability of shifting to the first RT game is higher than the probability of shifting to the second RT game.

  In this normal game, the winning probability of Replay 1 is approximately 1/15, and the winning probability of Bell 1 is approximately 4.3 / 1. However, since winning the replay 1 is not a condition for shifting to the RT game, even if the replay 1 is won, the normal game continues. Similarly, since winning for Bell 1 is not a condition for transitioning to the RT game, even if Bell 1 is won, the normal game continues.

  It should be noted that, when the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won, it cannot be determined from the display of the image display body 500 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. In addition, even if one of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of medals to be paid out is the same as five. Therefore, which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? It cannot be determined from the number of medals paid out. As a result, when the player wins the bell during the normal game, the player has a sense of expectation that the player may shift to the second RT game. In addition, when winning a bell 1 or a bell 2, it is difficult to know which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, so is the player a bell transitioning to the second RT game? There is also the fun of predicting whether or not.

  Similarly, when replay 1 or replay 2 is won, it cannot be determined from the display of the image display 500 about which of the replays 1 and 2 is won. Furthermore, since it is the same in the point which can be replayed even if it is a case where either replay is elected among the replay 1 and the replay 2, it understands further about which replay was won among the replay 1 and the replay 2. It has become difficult. As a result, when a replay is won during the normal game, the player has a desire to not move to the first RT game. In addition, when replay 1 or replay 2 is won, it is difficult to know which replay is won among replay 1 and replay 2, so is the player replaying the first RT game? There is also the fun of predicting whether or not.

  If BB or RB is won without winning either Replay 2 or Bell 2, the game shifts to the fifth RT game until the BB game or RB game is played.

  In this way, in the base game, depending on the winning combination, the number of medals owned by the player is increased, and the second RT game advantageous to the player over the base game or the medal held by the player is reduced. It is possible to shift to the first RT game that is disadvantageous to the player. It should be noted that the first RT game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or an RT game more advantageous than the first RT game unless 400 games are played or BB or RB is won.

  Further, when the “I male symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b by the player first operating the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211, for example, the player is elected to replay 1 or the bell 2 There is a possibility. If the winning combination is Replay 1 while the base game is in progress, the normal game continues without shifting to any RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the number of medals held by the player increases. It shifts to the 2nd RT game which is advantageous for a player at a point.

  Also, if the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211, for example, and the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is elected to replay 2 or the bell 1 There is a possibility. While the base game is in progress, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the normal game continues without shifting to any RT game, while if the winning combination is Replay 2, the reduction of the medal held by the player Transition to the first RT game, which is disadvantageous for the player at an early point. It should be noted that the first RT game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or an RT game more advantageous than the first RT game unless 400 games are played or BB or RB is won.

  As described above, in the normal game, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211, the player will be relieved by how the symbols stop in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. . Specifically, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 for the first time and the “I male symbol” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player is expected to enter the second RT game. While feeling a sense, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the first RT game, and the player is relieved. In addition, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211 to stop the “T child symbol” in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player desires not to move to the first RT game. On the other hand, it is determined that the game will not be shifted to the second RT game, and the player is relieved. In other words, the symbol “I male symbol” drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may shift to the second RT game but does not shift to the first RT game, and is drawn on the middle reel 301b. The symbol “T child symbol” that is displayed functions as an out symbol that may shift to the first RT game despite the possibility of shifting to the second RT game. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the player selects “H” on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that Replay 1 or Replay 2 is won. While the base game is in progress, if the winning combination is Replay 1, the normal game continues without shifting to any RT game, while if the winning combination is Replay 2, the decrease in medals held by the player Transition to the first RT game, which is disadvantageous for the player at an early point. It should be noted that the first RT game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or an RT game more advantageous than the first RT game unless 400 games are played or BB or RB is won.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the player selects “H” on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, it may have won the bell 1 or the bell 2. When the winning combination is Bell 1, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the normal game continues without shifting to any RT game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, the number of medals held by the player increases. It shifts to the 2nd RT game which is advantageous for a player at a point.

  As described above, even when the player operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211 first and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, the left reel 301a and the right reel on the active line. Depending on the design stopped at 301c, the player will be depressed. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “H male symbol” stops, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the second RT game, but there is still a possibility to transfer to the first RT game. I wish. In addition, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 211a among the reel stop buttons 211, and then operates the right reel stop button 211c, so that “M” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “child symbol” is stopped, the player has a sense of expectation to shift to the second RT game, but is relieved that the game will not be transferred to the first RT game. In other words, the symbol “H male symbol” drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line may shift to the first RT game, although there is no possibility of shifting to the second RT game. The symbol “M child symbol” that functions as an out symbol and is drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may shift to the second RT game but does not shift to the first RT game. Also, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, it is not possible to grasp whether or not to shift to the RT game until all reels are stopped. The player can not be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, during the normal game, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 211b among the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, and among the reel stop buttons 211, For example, when the left reel stop button 211a is first operated and then the right reel stop button 211c is operated, the expectation and disappointment each time each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is operated. A sense of inconvenience is mixed, and an innovative gaming machine that has never existed can be provided.

  It should be noted that, although the transition to the first RT game is almost always made when the replay 2 is won in the normal game, the transition to the first RT game is not always performed. As can be seen from FIG. 69 (a), when the extracted random number value is 6975, replay 2 and BB are selected in duplicate, and when the extracted random number value is 6982, replay 2 and RB are selected. Will be won in duplicate.

  As described above, when winning the replay 2 in the normal game is one of the conditions for shifting to the first RT game, when the replay 2 is won in the normal game, BB or RB may be won (At this time, it does not shift to the first RT game). Thereby, even if it is a case where replay 2 is won in a normal game, a BB game or an RB game may be performed rarely, without shifting to the 1st RT game. Therefore, when the replay 2 is won in the base game, the interest can be suppressed by giving the player a sense of expectation that has won the BB or RB.

  Similarly, in the normal game, when the player wins the bell 2, the transition to the second RT game is almost performed, but the transition to the second RT game is not always performed. As can be seen from FIG. 69 (a), in the case where the extracted random number value is any of 6966 to 6773, Bell 2 and BB are selected in duplicate, and the extracted random value is 6980. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  Thus, although winning the bell 2 in the normal game is one of the transition conditions to the second RT game, when winning the bell 2 in the normal game, BB or RB may be won (At this time, it does not shift to the second RT game). Thereby, even if it is a case where Bell 2 is won in the base game, in rare cases, the BB game or the RB game may be performed without shifting to the second RT game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more medals can be acquired in a shorter period than in the case of the normal game, so that the player is delighted and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[First RT game]
As described above, when the first RT game is won in the replay 2 during the normal game (when the replay 2 symbols are prepared), or when the third RT game is played in the replay 2 To be done.

  In this first RT game, the probability per winning of Replay 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB). Once the first RT game is entered, as described above, the first RT game will not end unless 400 games are played in the first RT game or BB or RB is won. In addition, this first RT game has the fastest decrease in medals held by the player among all RT games (almost the same as the normal game), and unless the 400 game is played or BB or RB is won, Since the game does not shift to another more advantageous RT game, the player desires to win BB or RB at an early stage.

  By the way, since the first RT game is performed by winning Replay 2 before the transition to the first RT game (that is, the base game or the third RT game), the player has a good image for Replay 2. Not hugging. That is, it is impressed by the player that if the player wins Replay 2, the player will be in a disadvantaged state. However, in the first RT game, when the replay 2 is won, the BB or the RB is always won and the BB game or the RB game is actually played when the replay 2 is won.

  In this way, in the normal game or the third RT game, the winning combination such as Replay 2, which is not good for the player, becomes the winning combination of BB or RB in the first RT game, which is a very advantageous winning combination for the player (that is, The player gets the impression that Replay 2 has been promoted from Bad to Good.) As a result, although the same winning combination such as Replay 2 is performed, the subsequent return varies depending on the type of RT game, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, even when a normal game or a third RT game is being played, replay 2 and BB or RB can be won in duplicate, but when replay 2 is won, most of them are per win. The player is unlikely to receive an impression that the BB game or the RB game is played when the replay 2 is won. On the other hand, in the 1st RT game, although the probability per overlap winning between Replay 2 and BB or RB is low, when winning Replay 2, a BB game or RB game is always performed, so that BB or RB is originally won. The replay 2 that is not obtained will be the role of finalizing the winning of BB or RB. In other words, in the first RT game, the player receives an impression that the BB game or the RB game is played even when the replay 2 that cannot be won in the BB or RB in the normal game or the third RT game is won. However, the frequency with which the BB game and the RB game are played is increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Second RT game]
As described above, the second RT game is won when Bell 2 is won during the normal game (when Bell 2 symbols are aligned), when Bell 2 is won while the third RT game is being played, or This is performed when the second RT game is being performed and the bell 2 is won.

  Even in this second RT game, the probability per single winning of Replay 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB). Once the second RT game is entered, as described above, unless the BB or RB is won in the second RT game, the second RT game is continued until 50 games are played. Also, in this 2nd RT game, since the medal held by the player increases, the desire to win BB or RB before moving to another RT game that is more disadvantageous to the player than this 2nd RT game Will be.

  By the way, in the base game or the third RT game before the transition to the second RT game), when the replay 2 is won, the player shifts to the first RT game, so the player does not have a good image of the replay 2. In other words, in the base game or the third RT game), the player recognizes that the player has fortunately moved to the second RT game because the bell 2 happens to be won before the replay 2, and if the player wins the replay 2, It is likely that the player still has the impression of being at a disadvantage to the player. However, in the 2nd RT game, when replay 2 is won, it is always overlapped with BB or RB. Therefore, when replay 2 is won, a BB game or an RB game is played.

  In this way, in the normal game or the third RT game, a winning combination such as Replay 2 that has a bad impression on the player becomes a double winning combination for BB or RB in the second RT game, which is a very advantageous winning combination for the player (that is, The player gets the impression that Replay 2 has been promoted from Bad to Good.) As a result, although the same winning combination such as Replay 2 is performed, the subsequent return varies depending on the type of RT game, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, even during normal times or when the 3rd RT game is being played, replay 2 and BB or RB can be won in duplicate, but when replay 2 is won, most of them are per single winner. The player is unlikely to receive an impression that the BB game or the RB game is played when the replay 2 is won. On the other hand, in the 2nd RT game, although the probability of overlapping winning between Replay 2 and BB or RB is low, when winning Replay 2, a BB game or RB game is always played, so that BB or RB is originally won. The replay 2 that is not obtained will be the role of finalizing the winning of BB or RB. In other words, in the 2nd RT game, the player receives the impression that the BB game or the RB game is played even when the replay 2 that cannot be won in the BB or RB in the normal game or the 3RT game is won. However, the frequency with which the BB game and the RB game are played is increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  If 50 games are played in this second RT game without winning BB or RB, then the game will be a normal game. In addition, when the player wins the bell 2 in this normal game, the game moves to the second RT game again. Therefore, even if 50 games of the second RT game are played and the game is shifted to the normal game, the player will not be discouraged. Therefore, the possibility that the game will be finished is low just because the second RT game is finished. Thereby, the fall of the operating rate of a game machine can be suppressed.

[5th RT game]
As described above, the fifth RT game is played after winning BB or RB until the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned.

  In the fifth RT game, the probability of winning BB or RB is zero. That is, once the BB flag or RB flag is turned ON, BB or RB will not be won unless a BB game or RB game is played.

  Also, the probability of winning a replay or small role is not much different from that in the normal game, and the probability of being lost is not much different from that in the normal game.

  Further, as described above, the reel pull-in control is performed in the priority order of the replay symbol, the BB symbol (or RB symbol), and the small symbol symbol when the plurality of winning combinations overlap. Therefore, if a replay is won when the fifth RT game is being played, the BB game or RB game will not start with the BB flag or RB flag as an opportunity even though the BB flag or RB flag is ON. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the image display body 500. Furthermore, if a small role is won during the 5th RT game, it is possible to align the BB symbol or RB symbol, but the push operation fails and the BB symbol or RB symbol cannot be aligned. At that time, the winning small role symbols will be aligned. As a result, in a game where a small role is won, even if the BB symbol or RB symbol cannot be aligned due to a failure of the pushing operation, other winning small role symbols will be aligned. It is possible to play the next game without decreasing it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Basic control of production operation]
The above is an example of control by the main control board (main control MPU) 409, but in the slot machine 1, various effect operations are controlled by the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU) 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the peripheral control board 510 (mainly the peripheral control MPU) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main control board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main control board 409 are temporarily stored in the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU) 510. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU) 510 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggestion effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (an appearance that pays out appearance, and may be an aspect that informs the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, which is an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as the production of the content that is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost. This suggestion effect is an effect that is performed only when a specific condition is satisfied, and is displayed over substantially the entire area of the effect display device 590. The specific condition corresponds to, for example, a case where a lottery for whether or not to perform a suggestion effect is won. However, in the slot machine 1, in order to eliminate wasteful effects as much as possible, the frequency of suggestion effects is reduced.

  For example, when the winning flag is BB, the notice effect can clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “bonus confirmed!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large amount of medals can be acquired) such as BB and RB that are pleasing to the player. That is, when a player wins BB or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate them. This announcement effect is performed only when BB or RB is won, and is always performed when BB or RB is won, and is displayed over substantially the entire area of the effect display device 590.

  In addition, as a continuous production mode, there is one corresponding to a gaming state such as a BB game, an RB game, or an RT game during a normal game. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player performs these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is a normal game or a BB game. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is inside.

  Then, during the RT game with a small number of RT games, a continuous effect is executed from the start to the end so that the player can recognize that fact. For example, a display that counts the number of RT games, or a sound effect that impresses the crisis as it approaches a specified number of times. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while confirming how many remaining RT games there are.

  Further, in the RT game having a large number of RT games, the continuous effect is executed, but the count display of the number of RT games may not be particularly performed. This is because it is unnecessary to worry about the end of the specified number of times when the RT game number of the RT game is a game period that is considerably long as viewed from the player. The fact that the count display of the number of times is not performed has an effect that, for example, if the player does not know the specified number of RT games, the RT game can be continued without knowing how long the RT game will continue. be able to.

  The effect modes described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display 500, the various speakers 201a, 201b, 221 and LED decoration. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[Stage production and stage transition control]
Next, a stage effect using at least a main image (including a moving image) displayed on substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the effect image in each stage, (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect image of the first stage, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect image of the second stage, (c) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 3rd stage, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 4th stage. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special stage effect image. The following stage effects and stage transition control are executed by the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU) 510.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of “stages” are provided in advance, and when the stage transition condition is satisfied, the stage machine shifts to any one “stage” and a stage effect unique to the “stage”. Is executed. In each “stage”, a main image (including a moving image) representing a motif unique to the “stage” is displayed and controlled as a specific stage effect, and a predetermined sound corresponding to the content of the effect is also displayed. Or a sound effect is output.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, the image display body 500 of the slot machine 1 is provided with a total of five stages: a first stage, a second stage, a third stage, a fourth stage, and a special stage. Then, in the gaming state (ie, the normal game and the RT game) excluding the bonus game (BB game, RB game), the process proceeds to one of the “stages” of the first to fourth stages and the special stage. Then, as shown in FIGS. 81A to 81D and FIG. 82, the image display 500 displays an effect image unique to the stage effect corresponding to the “stage”.

  Further, in the stage effects executed at each “stage”, the character's motion, background, and the like vary depending on the motif unique to the “stage”. For example, in the “first stage” shown in FIG. 81A, an effect image showing a state where the character is seated in the store is displayed. In the “second stage” shown in FIG. 81 (b), an effect image is displayed in which the character is walking on the sidewalk in the daytime. In the “third stage” shown in FIG. 81 (c), an effect image showing a state in which the character runs the motorcycle at low speed during the day is displayed. In the “fourth stage” shown in FIG. 81 (d), an effect image showing a state in which the character runs a motorcycle at high speed at night is displayed. In the “special stage” shown in FIG. 82, an effect image is displayed in which the character is shown driving the motorcycle at the highest speed in the morning.

  Here, the special stage is a stage where it is determined that the second RT game is being performed internally. That is, when the special stage effect is performed on the image display body 500, the number of medals held by the player increases with the progress of the game. Will be performed. In this way, in the special stage, the game can be performed while increasing the number of medals held, so the player plays the game while wishing to move to the special stage.

  The above five “stages” are subjected to transition control triggered by the establishment of the stage transition condition so as to depend on the internal gaming state (the base game and each RT game) of the slot machine 1. In other words, the transition of the “stage” is triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition so that the degree of expectation that the internal gaming state shifts to the special stage differs depending on each “stage”. Specifically, the expectation that the internal gaming state will shift to the special stage is the smallest in the first stage, the second stage is larger than the first stage, the third stage is larger than the second stage, The “stage” is controlled to shift so that the fourth stage is larger than the third stage. In other words, the “stage” indicating that the character's movement is intense and the speed of the motorcycle is high, the higher the expectation that the internal gaming state will shift to the special stage. In addition, the degree of expectation is represented by the number of ★ displayed on the effect display device 590 so that the player can easily grasp the degree of expectation to shift to the special stage (FIGS. 81A to 81D). reference). In FIG. 81, it is displayed outside the effect display device 590 for convenience.

  In the present embodiment, each “stage” will be described as indicating the degree of expectation that will shift to the special stage. However, each “stage” only needs to indicate the degree of expectation that the second RT game will be given. . More specifically, the “expected degree to which the second RT game is given” not only indicates the possibility that the second RT game is given as a result of the game performed at the time when the stage is displayed, but also in the near future. (For example, within several games or tens of games) indicating the possibility that the second RT game will be given, and further suggesting the possibility of switching from the stage to the “fourth stage” described later It may be.

  Hereinafter, the stage transition control performed in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically and in detail.

  First, except for bonus games (BB game, RB game), as described above, the gaming state most advantageous to the player is the second RT game with the lowest probability of losing and not shifting to the first RT game. It is. This is because it is possible to aim for winning the next bonus while increasing medals during a predetermined period (50G). Therefore, when the internal gaming state shifts to the second RT game, the effect image also shifts to the special stage, and the effect image as shown in FIG. 82 is displayed.

  Specifically, the transition condition to the second RT game is to win the bell 2 in a predetermined gaming state (normal state, third RT game, fourth RT game), unless a bonus is internally established. . Therefore, in principle, after winning the bell 2 in the predetermined gaming state, the stage effect of “special stage” is continuously executed until the second RT game is finished. The stage effect of the “special stage” allows the player to clearly understand that the game has shifted to the second RT game, and can enjoy the game in a very advantageous state for the player, the second RT game.

  In addition, among gaming states excluding bonus games (BB game, RB game), gaming states that may shift to the second RT game (in other words, gaming states with high expectation to shift to the second RT game) A third RT game and a fourth RT game. When the internal gaming state is controlled to either the third RT game or the fourth RT game, the stage state is controlled to “fourth stage”, and an effect image as shown in FIG. 81 (d) is displayed. Is done.

  Specifically, since the transition condition to the third RT game is the end of the BB game, after the BB game is ended, the stage effect of “fourth stage” is continuously executed until the third RT game is ended. Similarly, since the transition condition to the fourth RT game is the end of the RB game, after the RB game is ended, the stage effect of “fourth stage” is continuously executed until the fourth RT game is ended.

  The stage effect of the “fourth stage” makes it possible to clearly grasp the transition to a gaming state with a high expectation level for transition to the second RT game, and a state that is relatively advantageous to the player as the third RT game or the fourth RT game. You can enjoy the game at. Furthermore, after the bonus game (BB game, RB game) is over, the player realizes that there is a high expectation to shift to the second RT game, and expects even after the end of the bonus game, where interest is likely to decline. You can enjoy the game while maintaining. Thereby, even if the bonus game is ended, the possibility of losing the willingness to continue the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, the normal game is also a gaming state in which there is a possibility of shifting to the second RT game, similarly to the third RT game and the fourth RT game. Therefore, the stage state can be controlled to the “fourth stage” even when the internal gaming state is controlled by the normal game. For example, since the transition to the normal game is made after the end of the second RT game, the stage effect of “the fourth stage” is continuously executed after the end of the second RT game until the end of the base game. The stage effect of the “fourth stage” indicates that the player has a high expectation to move to the second RT game, and even if the second RT game ends, the player may return to the second RT game again. You can enjoy the game while maintaining your expectation.

In other words, among the “stages” shown in FIGS. 81A to 81D, when the gaming state is controlled to a predetermined gaming state (normal game, third RT game, fourth RT game), the bell 2 The second RT when the pattern is ready
A “fourth stage” (see FIG. 81 (d)) indicating that the game is surely given can be displayed. In other words, when “4th stage” is displayed, the second RT game is always given when the two Bell symbols are aligned, so it is determined that the internal gaming state is controlled to the predetermined gaming state. To do. Note that, unlike the other stages, the “fourth stage” does not have a so-called “gasse” display, and functions as a special confirmed effect in which the second RT game is surely given when the bell 2 symbols are arranged.

When the stage state is controlled to the “fourth stage” and the bell 2 symbols are aligned as described above, the stage shifts to the “special stage”, while the first to third stages are satisfied according to the following conditions established. Transition to stage (stage demotion) is performed. Specifically, when the stage state is controlled to “fourth stage” and the gaming state is controlled to the base game or the fourth RT game, that is,
・ When the second RT game is finished and the game is shifted to the normal game, and the stage effect of “fourth stage” is performed in the normal game. When the RT game is finished and the stage effect of the “fourth stage” is performed as it is in the normal game that has been transferred thereafter. When the internal gaming state is controlled by the first RT game, stage transition control (stage demotion) to any of “first stage” to “third stage” is performed. It should be noted that which of the plurality of lower stages is to be demoted is determined according to the result of the stage shift lottery described later. However, as described above, even if the replay 2 is complete, there are rare cases where BB or RB is won.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 590 is arranged so that the effect display device 590 is substantially in front of the player's face, and the symbol variation display device 300 is above the effect display device 590. Is arranged. Moreover, since the display area of the effect display device 590 is larger than that of the symbol variation display device 300, when the player plays a game with a reasonable posture, the player easily sees an image displayed on the effect display device 590. be able to. On the other hand, when the player plays a game with a reasonable posture, it is more difficult for the player to see the image displayed on the symbol variation display device 300 than to see the image displayed on the effect display device 590. Become. Thus, unless the player is conscious of playing the game while looking at the symbol variation display device 300, the player watches the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590 during the game. This means that while the effect display device 590 is arranged in the player's gaze area during the game, the symbol variation display device 300 is arranged outside the player's gaze area during the game.

  As a result, an advanced player who is confident in the appearance often plays a game while looking at the symbol variation display device 300, while a player who finds the effect more interesting than the appearance is displayed in the effect display. The game is often performed while viewing the effect image displayed on the device 590.

  By the way, in this slot machine 1, whether or not to perform a continuous effect mode that is performed over a plurality of games on the image display body 500 when one of all the small roles and losers that do not overlap with the bonus is won as the winning combination. Lottery (continuous production lottery). When the continuous effect lottery is won, a continuous effect mode is displayed on the image display body 500. In this continuous production mode, it is derived that the bonus was not won as a result of the series of productions despite the series of productions performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous production failure). However, at this time, even if the continuous production fails, there is a possibility of shifting to a special stage, and a double expectation is given to the player with one continuous production. In addition, although the player is disappointed once due to the failure of the continuous performance, the player is moved to the special stage after that, so that the joy given to the player at that time becomes great, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the continuous production lottery is not won, a single production mode that is completed only by one game is displayed. On the other hand, when winning a bonus (including a single winning combination and a shared winning combination), it is always derived that the bonus was won as a result of a series of effects performed over a plurality of games regardless of the continuous effect lottery. A production mode is displayed (so-called continuous production success).

  In addition, it is desirable that when winning a small role as a winning combination, it is easier to win a continuous effect lottery (that is, easier to execute a continuous effect mode) than when winning a winning combination as a winning combination. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the bonus winning will be notified to the small role as a result of the continuous performance mode rather than the loser. In addition, it is desirable that a small role having a higher overlapping ratio with bonuses is more likely to win a continuous performance lottery among small roles. As a result, the player's expectation that a bonus winning will be announced as a result of the continuous performance mode to a bonus role with a lower bonus overlap rate (eg, cherry) than a bonus role with a lower bonus overlap rate (eg, bell). The degree can be increased.

  Further, in the present slot machine 1, when a continuous effect mode is performed on the image display body 500 when one of all the small roles and losers that do not overlap with the bonus is selected as the winning role, the continuous effect mode is performed. A lottery for determining the “stage” to be transferred later is performed (stage transfer lottery). That is, the above-described continuous performance mode is an opportunity to perform stage transition control, and it is determined by stage shift lottery which stage is to be shifted to after the continuous performance mode is performed.

  By the way, as described above, when the replay 2 symbols are aligned and the internal gaming state is demoted to the first RT game, the continuous effect mode is always displayed regardless of the continuous effect lottery. Then, it is determined by stage shift lottery which of the “first stage” to “third stage” is shifted from the “fourth stage”. Then, while the internal gaming state is controlled by the first RT game, the transition control is performed to any one of “first stage” to “third stage” in response to execution of the continuous performance mode. (Of course, the same stage may be maintained as it is after the continuous performance mode is performed).

  When the internal gaming state is controlled by the first RT game, the closer to the predetermined number of times (400 times) that is the end condition of the RT game, the easier it is to win the continuous effect lottery (ie, Continuous production mode is easy to be executed). Furthermore, a higher stage is easily selected as a transfer destination in the stage transfer lottery. Specifically, the “second stage” higher than the “first stage” is easily selected, and the “third stage” higher than the “second stage” is easily selected.

  In addition, based on the fact that the number of RT games of the first RT game has reached a predetermined number (400 times), when the first RT game ends and the game moves to the normal game, it becomes easier to win the continuous effect lottery. At the same time, it becomes easier to select a higher stage as the destination in the stage transition lottery. Specifically, a higher “fourth stage” than “first stage” to “third stage” is easily selected.

  As a result, the ratio of the transition from the “fourth stage” to the lower stage and the transitional stage is executed relatively frequently, or the transition to the relatively higher “stage” after the continuous stage is executed. If it becomes higher, it is possible to detect that the end of the first RT game, which is disadvantageous to the player, is close, or that the first RT game has ended, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to give a clue to guess an internal gaming state to a player who has started playing the game from the middle, and to increase the pleasure of selecting a table to play from a plurality of slot machines 1.

  In addition, in the “fourth stage” after the bonus game and the “fourth stage” after the second RT game as described above, only the “fourth stage” is selected in the stage transition lottery unless the two replay symbols are prepared in principle. The Therefore, unless the replay 2 symbols are prepared, the stage effect by the “fourth stage” is continuously executed after the continuous effect mode is executed. In the “fourth stage”, the stage transition lottery is not performed, so that the “fourth stage” may always be maintained after the continuous effect mode is executed.

  As described above, according to the stage effects and stage transition control executed in the slot machine 1, the degree of expectation that the internal gaming state is advantageous to the player for each of a plurality of “stages” (specifically (Expectation to enter the second RT game that is most advantageous to the player) is increased, and each “stage” is controlled to shift in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. Therefore, each stage has a different stage performance and expectation and can change game play, and the player is excited about the promotion of the upper “stage” and the lowering of the “stage”. The monotony of the game in the game state other than the bonus game can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the above stage transition control is performed at the time of continuous production failure, even if a bonus winning is not derived as a result of the continuous production mode, the “stage” that moves after the continuous production mode is expected. It is possible to concentrate the player's interest in the continuous performance mode and suppress the decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the conventional slot machine, it is known that a gaming state (so-called RT state) advantageous to the player is given a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 times) after the bonus game ends. However, this is an RT game that is an additional privilege based on the premise of winning the bonus, and unless the bonus is won, there will be no bonus and the game will still be monotonous. There was a problem of lowering. Also, during the RT state after the end of the bonus game, the game can be continued without reducing medals, so the interest is maintained. However, after the end of the RT state, the interest of the game is reduced, and the player's game The intention to continue was lost.

  Further, in a normal gaming state, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific symbol combination (out) is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reel), a gaming state advantageous to the player (high replay probability) It is known to provide an advantageous RT state. On the other hand, if such an advantageous RT state is frequently given, in addition to the value of the privilege of the RT state becoming relatively low, in order to maintain the balance between the player and the hole, the bonus winning probability is kept low as a whole. Inevitably, the game as a whole tended to be monotonous and difficult to win a bonus.

  Therefore, in a normal gaming state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined symbol combination (out) is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reel), the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player (low replay probability is low). It is known to provide a disadvantageous RT state. In other words, it is known that, by giving this disadvantageous RT state for a long period of time, an advantageous RT state does not occur until the next bonus winning, and the balance between the player and the hole is maintained. However, there is a problem that the interest of the player is remarkably lowered when the transition to such a disadvantageous RT state cannot be expected.

  By the way, in this slot machine 1, as a basic flow of the gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal game when a predetermined number of games are played at least according to the progress of the game in the first RT game. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming state is controlled by the normal game (specifically, when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned), the gaming state is controlled by the second RT game (in other words, the second RT game). Is granted). As a result, even if the gaming state shifts to the first RT game that is disadvantageous to the player, the degree of shifting of the gaming state from the first RT game to the second RT game increases as the game progresses. Further, until the bonus game (BB game, RB game) is awarded, the progress of the game is controlled in such a manner that the first RT game and the normal game are repeated, and from the normal game to the second RT game almost periodically. Can be given.

  That is, the slot machine 1 has the first privilege (bonus game) and the second privilege (second RT game) as special privileges given according to the result of the internal lottery. And in a predetermined gaming state (normal game, RT3 game, RT4 game), since either the first privilege or the second privilege can be selectively given, the expectation of both privileges is always maintained. While playing games. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state (RT1 game, RT2 game), since only the first privilege can be granted, the player's interest tends to decrease without expectation of the second privilege. Since there is a possibility that the game is controlled to a normal game to which the second privilege can be given periodically, it has a game property that can maintain interest in all game states.

  In addition, in order to make a player recognize that the 2nd privilege (2nd RT game) is a kind of special privilege very advantageous to a player over multiple games similarly to a 1st privilege (bonus game). When the provision of these special benefits is started, an effect different from the normal “stage” is displayed on the effect display device 590. Specifically, when the bonus game is started, a first privilege effect (similar to the conventional bonus effect) that congratulates the player to whom the bonus game is given is displayed on the effect display device 590, and the second RT game is started. Then, the second privilege effect (“special stage” shown in FIG. 82) for congratulating the player who is given the second RT game is displayed on the effect display device 590.

  Then, the “stage” displayed on the effect display device 590 enables the player to grasp the degree of expectation that the second privilege (second RT game) will be given, and the degree of expectation that the second RT game will be given. Is likely to shift to the “fourth stage” (see FIG. 81 (d)) with the highest warning. As a result, not only can the user enjoy the “stage” that is appropriately shifted according to the progress of the game, but also the timing for shifting to the “fourth stage” according to the transition mode of the “stage” (and thus the “special stage” to which the second RT game is given. The pleasure of measuring the timing of “ In particular, when the stage shifts to the “fourth stage”, since the player senses that the second RT game is always given if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, the expectation for the second RT game is increased and the interest is significantly increased.

  In particular, while “first to third stages” (see FIGS. 81A to 81C) with low expectations are displayed on the effect display device 590, the second RT game is played even if the bell 2 symbols are aligned. Although it is not granted, or even if the Bell 2 symbols are aligned, the second RT game is not necessarily granted, but the expectation from the “first to third stage” to the second RT game is stepped up step by step. In particular, when the stage shifts to the “fourth stage”, the player perceives that the second RT game is awarded if the Bell 2 symbols are aligned, so the expectation for the second RT game increases and the interest increases significantly.

  As described above, when “stage” is displayed on the effect display device, the first privilege (bonus game) can always be expected and the second privilege (second RT game) is periodically provided. In addition, as the “stage” is appropriately changed to one having a higher expected degree of grant of the second RT game, the player's interest is gradually improved as the game progresses. Furthermore, when the “fourth stage” is displayed on the effect display device 590, if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, the second RT game is surely given, so that the player's interest increases at a stretch, Eliminating the player's anxiety that it may be a Gase production ", the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, when the “special stage” (see FIG. 82) is displayed, in addition to being able to enjoy the game while gradually increasing medals by the second RT game, after the “special stage” is ended, Since the “stage” (see FIG. 81 (d)) is displayed, the player can grasp that the second RT game is surely given again when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned. Then, by displaying the “fourth stage” and the “special stage” alternately, the game progresses without the player's interest and excitement being interrupted. As a result, depending on the number of times the “fourth stage” and “special stage” loops are displayed (that is, the number of loops of the normal game and the second RT game), even if the bonus combination is not won, It is possible to win more medals than the game, and it may be worth more than one bonus game, so the player's interest can be further improved.

[Number of remaining RTs on special stage]
Next, the remaining RT count display in the special stage will be described. In the present embodiment, among the “first RT game” to “fifth RT game”, the “second RT game” that is most advantageous to the player is the remaining RT in the “special stage” stage shown in FIG. Display the number of games.

  More specifically, as described above, when the transition condition to the second RT game is established and the internal gaming state shifts to the second RT game, the stage state is set to “special” after the continuous performance mode is executed. Move to “Stage”. Then, until the predetermined number of games is executed after the stage state shifts to the “special stage”, the remaining second RT game number is displayed on the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 as “remaining ?? game”. The fact that it is unknown is displayed (see FIG. 82 (a)). That is, although the display area for displaying the remaining number of RT games is provided on the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500, a specific remaining number of RT games is not clearly indicated.

  After the transition to the second RT game, when the RT game is executed for a predetermined number of games (here, 20 games), the remaining number of RT games is displayed on the image display body 500 as “30 games remaining”. Is displayed (see FIG. 82 (b)). Thereafter, every time one game is executed, the remaining RT game number is displayed by subtracting “1”. For example, when one game is executed in a state where “30 remaining games” is displayed as the remaining RT game count, the remaining RT game count is displayed as a subtraction display of “29 remaining games”.

  As a result, the player can clearly grasp how many games the “special stage” (that is, the second RT game) will be continued, and the “special stage” can be played with peace of mind without suddenly ending. Can enjoy. In addition, the number of remaining RT games is displayed in a subtracted manner, so that as the remaining RT games count decreases, the player's desire to win the bonus sooner can be stimulated, further enhancing the interest of the game during the RT game Can be made.

  By the way, the “special stage” (that is, the second RT game) is a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player except for the bonus. Called a special stage transition effect). In other words, this special stage transition effect suggests that the degree of expectation to shift to the “special stage” is extremely high. ing.

  Specifically, in this special stage transition effect, in a series of effects over several games, an effect is first made in which a specific character says “I can see XX” in the first game. Then, in the subsequent game (may be the next game or a game several times later), when the object “XX” is displayed, the promotion to the second RT game is confirmed, and from the next game “special stage” Is started. On the other hand, if the target object “XX” is not displayed in the subsequent game, the player is not promoted to the second RT game, and another stage selected in the stage transition lottery is started from the next game.

  Actually, if the Bell 2 symbols are ready when the special stage transition effect is started, the second RT game is started from the next game. Therefore, the second RT game is internally performed during the special stage transition effect. Is already executed, and in the special stage transition effect, the object “XX” is always displayed and the process proceeds to the “special stage”. Conversely, if the bell 2 symbols are not ready when the special stage transition effect is started, the internal game state does not change, and the special stage transition effect displays the object “XX”. There is no transition to the “special stage”. That is, even if the player does not refer to the special stage transition effect, the player can determine whether or not to shift to the “special stage” depending on whether or not the bell 2 symbols are aligned in the symbol display window 591a.

  In this regard, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the symbol variation display device 330 is less likely to be watched by the player and a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the winning symbol displayed in the symbol display window 591a. Etc. Therefore, the player's interest is mainly concentrated on the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the “special stage” depending on whether or not the bell 2 symbols are prepared. Has become difficult. Accordingly, it is possible to derive whether or not to shift to the “special stage” with a special stage transition effect executed by the image display body 500 in an aspect that has an impact beyond the simple appearance that the two bell symbols are aligned. , It can make the player more excited.

  As described above, the remaining RT game number is not specified immediately after the transition to the “special stage”, but the remaining RT game number is specified after execution of the predetermined number of games for the following reason.

  That is, as described above, when the second bell symbols are arranged in a predetermined gaming state, the second RT game is started from the next game, and the “special stage” is continuously executed over several games (for example, three games). Since the transition is made after passing through the production mode, there is a slight difference (time lag) between the timing at which the second RT game is started and the timing at which the “special stage” is started. Therefore, when the number of remaining RT games is displayed at the same time as the “special stage” is started, the number of second RT games executed in the continuous effect mode is not the RT game number of “50 times” which is the end condition of the second RT game. It is “47 times” excluding (that is, 3 games).

  On the other hand, it is normal for the player to recognize that the second RT game is started simultaneously with the transition to the “special stage”. As a result, if the remaining RT game number displayed at the same time as the “special stage” is started is displayed as “47 times” which is smaller than the original remaining RT game number “50 times”, the second RT game is set to 3 There is a problem that the feeling of loss is felt while feeling lost, and the interest is lowered. Further, if the halfway remaining RT game number such as “47 times” is displayed, the player cannot have a suspicion that illegal processing is being performed in the slot machine 1. Furthermore, if the number of games required for the continuous production mode changes every time depending on the result of the continuous production lottery, the number of remaining RT games that are different each time will be displayed as an initial value every time the “special stage” is entered, The player's feelings of loss and suspicion are further increased.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of games are executed after shifting to the second RT game regardless of the timing of shifting to the “special stage” (in other words, regardless of the number of games required for the continuous effect mode). The number of remaining RT games has been specified after being played. As a result, even if the timing for shifting to the “special stage” is variable (in other words, even if the number of games required for the continuous production mode changes each time), the “special stage” is not affected by these. Each time a transition is made, the same remaining RT game number (here, 30 times) can be displayed as an initial value. Moreover, “30 times” which is a natural numerical value (specifically, a multiple of 5 or a multiple of 10) as the counting unit can be displayed as the remaining RT game number.

  Thereby, the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind without having the above-mentioned feeling of loss or doubt with respect to the number of remaining RT games. Rather, after the transition to the “special stage”, the number of remaining RT games, which was not specified at the beginning, is clearly indicated after the predetermined number of games has been digested, so that the “special stage” (number of remaining RT games) is as if the predetermined number It is possible to give an impression as if it has been extended by the number of times (here, 30 times), and to delight the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the maximum remaining number of games can be displayed in the second RT game in which the maximum number of games is set in advance, the second RT game is set in spite of the maximum number of games in the second RT game being set in advance. By displaying that the number of remaining games is unknown without displaying the number of remaining games of the second RT game at the time of transition, in addition to the above effects, the number of remaining games is not set in advance. It also has the effect of giving the impression that it is variable.

  When 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB during the second RT game, the second RT game ends and becomes a normal game, and the effect display device 590 displays the effect image of the fourth stage. Is displayed. In the normal game, when the player wins the bell 2 before the replay 2, the game moves to the second RT game internally again, and the effect stage also shifts to the special stage again through the continuous effect mode.

  Thus, even if 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB during the second RT game and the second RT game ends, the RT game is disadvantageous to the player like the first RT game. Since it shifts to the base game which can transfer to a 2nd RT game again instead of shifting, possibility that the willingness to continue a game may be lost is reduced, and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

[Bet number display meter and bonus expectation level display meter]
Next, a bet number display meter and a bonus expectation level display meter displayed on the front surface of the effect display device 590 of the image display body 500 at each stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. FIG. 83 shows a bet number display meter, and FIG. 84 shows a bonus expectation level display meter. Both the bet number display meter and the bonus expectation level display meter are not displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 590, but are displayed only in a part of the area (lower left area) (FIG. 82 (a)). , (B)).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the bet number is zero after the game is over, for example, the hand points to zero in the bet number display meter. When the 1-bet button 205 (see FIG. 1) is operated once or when one medal is inserted, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the hand of the bet number display meter points to 1. Further, when the 1-bet button 205 is operated once or a medal is inserted, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the needle of the bet number display meter indicates 2. Similarly, when the 1-bet button 205 is further operated once or a medal is inserted, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the needle of the bet number display meter indicates 3. When the hand of the bet number display meter indicates 3, the character “READY” is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that it became the state which can start a game. Then, when the start lever 210 is operated, characters “GO” are displayed as shown in FIG. Thereby, the player can grasp that the game has actually started.

  It should be noted that when the player operates the MAX bet button 206 when the bet number is zero, an aspect (0) indicating that the bet number is zero without going through the processes of FIGS. 83 (b) and 83 (c). FIG. 83 (a)) changes to a mode (FIG. 83 (d)) indicating that the number of bets is three.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the replay symbols or the small role symbols are prepared, the greater the number of medals to be paid out, the higher the expectation that the BB or RB is won. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the replay symbols or small role symbols are prepared, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed to appeal to the player's vision of the degree of expectation of winning the bonus. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84, when the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, medals corresponding to the winning combination symbols are paid out, and the number of medals paid out is determined as a bonus expectation level display meter. Is displayed. The scale of the bonus expectation level display meter includes “re (meaning replay as replay)”, “5 (equivalent to the number of paid out bells)”, “9 (equivalent to the number of paid out watermelons)”, “ 12 (corresponding to the number of cherries paid out) ”and“ V ”are displayed in the order from low expectation to high expectation.

  Then, when the replay (replay 1, replay 2) is won and the replay symbols are aligned, the bonus expectation display meter hands indicate the vicinity of “re” as shown in FIG. Characters are displayed. As a result, even if both replay 1 and replay 2 are arranged, the character “re” as a symbol indicating replay is displayed, so that the player grasps whether replay 1 is arranged or replay 2 is arranged. Difficult to do. Similarly, when the bell symbols (bell 1, bell 2) are won and the bell symbols are aligned, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the bonus expectation display meter indicates the vicinity of “5” and the number of medals to be paid out. "5" and a bell picture are displayed. As a result, even if either the bell 1 or the bell 2 is aligned, a picture of the bell as a symbol indicating the bell is displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the bell 1 is aligned or the bell 2 is aligned. It becomes. Also, when the watermelon is selected after winning the watermelon, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the needle of the bonus expectation display meter shows the vicinity of “9” and “9” corresponding to the medal payout number and the watermelon Is displayed. Further, when the cherry is selected and the cherry symbols are arranged, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the bonus expectation display meter needle indicates the vicinity of “12” and “12” corresponding to the medal payout number and cherry Is displayed. Also, when BB or RB is won and the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), “V” is indicated so that the needle of the bonus expectation display meter is completely shaken, and the BB game or RB game Is started. Even if the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned, the number of medals to be paid out is zero, but since the value of the game given to the player after that is great, the needle of the bonus expectation display meter can be swung out. “V” is indicated.

  Thus, in proportion to the number of medals to be paid out as an award when the replay symbol or small role symbol is aligned (in the case where the replay symbol is aligned, there is no medal payout as an award). By displaying the needle of the bonus expectation degree display meter, it is possible to quantitatively instruct the player about the expectation degree that the BB or the RB has been won repeatedly.

  In addition, since multiple small roles and BB or RB may be won in duplicate (in this embodiment, watermelon, cherry and BB (RB) may have been won). Depending on the skill of the mainstream (that is, depending on the small roles to be matched), there may be a small role symbol (cherry) with a relatively high expectation, or a small role symbol (watermelon) with a relatively low expectation level. Sometimes it is even. As a result, even if the winning combination is the same, but the expectation displayed on the bonus expectation display meter differs depending on the player's operation, it is possible to align the small role symbol (cherry) with a relatively high expectation In this case, the player feels as if he / she was able to win the BB or RB with his own power, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[Special display control]
By the way, in the slot machine 1 in which the display effect is performed by the effect display device 590 as described above, when the content of the display effect is contrary to expectation, the player displays the effect display as a retaliation measure for such a betrayal act. The display screen of the device 590 may be beaten. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the transparent plate 214a is provided on the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 590 to protect it. Still further, when an impact is applied to the transparent plate 214a, the pressure determination board for determining the position where the impact is applied and the magnitude of the force applied to the impact based on the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a. 878 (see FIG. 52). When it is determined that the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a by the pressure determination substrate 878 exceeds a predetermined upper limit (predetermined threshold), it is assumed that there is a beating action on the display screen. Special display control is performed as a countermeasure.

  Here, in describing the special display control, a more detailed configuration of the pressure determination board 878 will be described first.

  The pressure determination board 878 according to this embodiment is electrically connected to the door decoration drive board 860 via the 5-pin connector 869 (see FIG. 60). More specifically, the power supply line ("+ 5V" drive voltage and GND) from the door decoration drive board 860 (peripheral control board 510) side is used by using 3 of the 5 pin connectors 869. It receives the supply and the input of the clock signal S-CLK. Similarly, data transmission (serial signal S-DATA2 and serial signal S-DATA2 to the door decoration drive board 860 (peripheral control board 510) side is performed using two of the five-pin connectors 869. The latch signal S-LATCH2) can be executed. As will be described later, the pressure determination board 878 receives a detection signal from a pressure sensor (not shown) for detecting the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a.

  In such a configuration, when a detection signal from the pressure sensor is taken in, the position and magnitude of the pressure applied are determined based on the detection signal. Next, based on the determination result, position data indicating the position where the pressure is applied and pressure value data indicating the magnitude of the pressure are created. Of these, regarding pressure value data, whether or not there has been a beating action on the display screen on the peripheral control board 510 side, such as data indicating whether the magnitude of the pressure exceeds a predetermined upper limit. Can be determined, and in this sense, the data does not necessarily have to indicate the magnitude of the pressure itself.

  Then, after the pressure data (position data, pressure value data) indicating the position where the pressure is applied and the magnitude thereof are created in this way, the pressure data is determined according to the input clock signal. The serial signal S-DATA2 is transmitted and output to the door decoration drive board 860. That is, the pressure data (serial signal S-DATA2) transmitted and output to the door decoration drive board 860 in this way is taken into the peripheral control board 510 via the peripheral relay board 123, and the special data by the peripheral control board 510 is obtained. Will be used for proper display control. As described above, when the pressure data (serial signal S-DATA2) is transmitted and output, the latch signal S-LATCH2 is also transmitted and output.

  Next, the special display control performed by the peripheral control board 510 that has received such pressure data will be described in detail.

  In the peripheral control board 510, in the case of a display effect appearing on the display screen of the effect display device 590, first, information indicating the progress of the game (various commands related to the game) is acquired from the main control board 409. Next, an effect mode data table (a plurality of prepared tables may be one or more) associated with the acquired information is determined, and a plurality of display effects registered in the determined effect mode data table are determined. One of (production patterns) is selected.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pressure data (especially pressure value data here) transmitted and output from the pressure determination board 878 indicates that there has been a beating action on the display screen. As a result, when it is determined that there is no beating action on the display screen, the production information indicating the selected display production (production pattern) is output to the liquid crystal control board. Display control of the display device 590 is performed. That is, in this case, the liquid crystal control board reads effect image data corresponding to the output effect information from the image ROM (liquid crystal data ROM substrate). This effect image data indicates the output mode of the drive signal for the dot matrix type display screen (a plurality of pixels) separately for each pixel. Therefore, the liquid crystal control board (liquid crystal output board) outputs drive signals separately for the plurality of pixels in the output mode indicated by the effect image data. As a result, the display effects (such as the suggestion effect, the notification effect, the payout appearance, the continuous effect, etc.) selected by the peripheral control board 510 appear on the display screen of the effect display device 590 as an image.

  However, in the peripheral control board 510 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the pressure data (especially, the pressure value data here) indicates that there has been a beating action on the display screen, the selection is made. In addition to the effect information indicating the display effect (effect pattern), at least the position data of the pressure data is further output to the liquid crystal control board.

  That is, in this case, the liquid crystal control board first acquires image data for damage suitable for the position data based on the position data so that the damage image appears at the beaten position on the display screen. As a specific method for acquiring such data, for example, a plurality of the above-mentioned damage image data are prepared, and the most suitable for the hit position among the prepared plurality of damage image data. A method for selectively acquiring image data for damage in which a damaged image appears based on the position data can be exemplified. As another method, image data for damage larger than the screen size of the effect display device 590 is prepared and displayed on the display screen of the image data for damage according to the position data. It is also possible to exemplify a method of creating and acquiring damage image data that matches the position data by variably setting the region (coordinate control).

  After the damage image data is acquired in this way, the effect image data is modified based on the damage image data. For example, only the output mode indicated by the damage image data among the output modes is adopted for the pixels whose drive signal output mode is indicated by both the effect image data and the damage image data. In this way, the image data for presentation is modified. As a result, the drive signal is output separately for the plurality of pixels in the output mode indicated by the modified effect image data (output image data), and thus on the image indicated by the effect image data. The image indicated by the image data for damage appears on board. That is, in this case, the damaged image appears in place of the display effect image only at the position where the strike action is performed on the display screen. Therefore, a person who strikes the display screen has to be aware of the possibility that the display device has been damaged due to the real situation that only the part that has been beaten in this way has an adverse effect.

  FIG. 85 shows an example of a display screen when special display control according to such position data is performed. Hereinafter, an example of a display image that appears on the display screen when special display control is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), a display that does not clearly indicate the number of remaining RT games appears on the display screen of the effect display device 590, and such an ambiguous display effect is dissatisfied. It is assumed that the person strikes the display screen of the effect display device 590 as the retaliation measure. Then, when the pressure according to such a beating action is detected by the pressure determination board 878, the display screen is damaged through the special display control by the peripheral control board 510 (liquid crystal control board). The image appears on the effect image shown in FIG.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85A, a “crack image” indicating a state in which a crack is generated is displayed as the damaged image appearing on the display screen. Like to do. This “cracked image” has a high-density region X in which cracks (damaged portions) are generated at a high density, and is a damaged image showing a state in which cracks spread around the high-density region X. Yes.

  Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal control board acquires damage image data that matches the position data so that the high-density region X is displayed at the beaten position on the display screen. Then, output image data is created so that the image (cracked image) indicated by the acquired damage image data appears on the image indicated by the effect image data (FIG. 82 (a)). Then, display output is performed separately for the plurality of pixels based on the output image data.

  According to such a configuration, when a player hits the display screen (more precisely, the transparent plate 214a), does a crack (damaged part) appear directly at the hit position? A display image like this is performed. As a result, it is possible to appeal the brittleness of the effect display device 590 while adopting the protective structure by the transparent plate 214a, and as a result, it is recognized by the player that such brittleness is recognized. Will be able to reduce the opportunity to be. An important point in obtaining such an excellent effect is to clarify the causal relationship between the hit by the player and the appearance of a crack (damaged portion). The slot according to this embodiment In the machine 1, the position hit by the player is detected (pressure determination board 878), and a crack (damaged part) is directly displayed as an image (peripheral control board 510, liquid crystal control board) at the detected position. This is achieved.

  In addition, the image data for damage according to this embodiment includes any one of a normal assumption pixel that can output the driving signal separately from the plurality of pixels and an abnormal assumption pixel that cannot output the driving signal. The crab is classified in advance. That is, in the liquid crystal control board, by modifying the acquired effect image data based on such damage image data, a portion where a “cracked image” appears in the dot matrix type display screen (abnormality) The drive signal is not output (no voltage is applied) to the hypothetical pixel). Thus, when a player strikes the display screen (more precisely, the transparent plate 214a), a drive signal is output only to a part of the display screen (normally assumed pixels). Thus, the appearance of dot drop (pixel drop) due to cracks appearing in the damaged portion determined according to the position data. As described above, since the situation at the time of actual failure appears, a person who strikes the display screen (more precisely, the transparent plate 214a) is forced to look directly at the reality that cannot be avoided. And from the fear of being held socially responsible for his actions, he will be careful not to do such actions thereafter. In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the so-called normally white system (the liquid crystal panel has a maximum transmittance or reflectance when the voltage is not applied (a state in which the screen turns white) and is transmitted when the voltage is applied. Therefore, a white light emitting display appears in the portion where the “cracked image” appears.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rendering image data is modified so that a drive signal is not output to the abnormal assumed pixel among the normal assumed pixel and the abnormal assumed pixel, and the modified image data is thus modified. A drive signal is output only to the normal assumed pixels based on the effect image data. For this reason, in addition to the effect image data used in the normal state (the state in which the beating action is not detected), dedicated image data in the abnormal state (the state in which the beating action is detected) is not prepared. In both cases, the game effect in the normal state can be displayed as usual in the portion corresponding to the normal assumed pixel. In addition, since the game effect in the normal state is displayed indifferently on the portion corresponding to the normal assumed pixel as described above, the person who strikes the display screen can detect the beating action (pressure determination means). ) Is difficult to judge even if it is a gaming machine equipped with. As a result, the possibility of damaging the display device can be made more conscious.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, once the “crack image” indicating that the hit has been applied is displayed once, the “crack image” is displayed over a plurality of games. This is continuously kept as history information (peripheral control board 510, liquid crystal control board). In such a configuration, when a player hits the display screen, a “cracked image” as evidence of the hit appears on the display screen over a plurality of games. . As a result, the technical support (evidence image) can be used to alert and leave the player without having to monitor all the players in the amusement hall (hall) to find out where the player is beating. It becomes easy to perform a warning or the like.

  Note that “multiple games” means that the game is performed a plurality of times until the reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 starts rotating and is stopped several times. An internal lottery (a lottery for selecting any combination from a general combination and a lost combination) performed in response to an operation (start operation) of the start lever 210 may be performed a plurality of times. In addition, as a mode of display control for “cracked image” remaining over a plurality of games, a predetermined number of games is consumed from a game in which “damaged image (“ cracked image ”)” appears. Predetermined time after the appearance of the evidence image or the damaged image ("cracked image") (a time longer than the time from the appearance of the damaged image until the end of one game) ) For example, “a mode of continuing to display the evidence image until the elapse of time”, “a mode of continuing to display the evidence image until a predetermined condition is satisfied by an operation by the player after the damaged image appears”, and the like. be able to.

  Incidentally, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the evidence image is continuously displayed until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed from the game in which the “damage image (“ cracked image ”) appears. "Aspect" is adopted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the display effect may be switched to display the remaining number of RT games while the damaged image (“cracked image”) is displayed. After that, each time one game is executed with the damaged image (“cracked image”) displayed, the remaining RT game count is displayed with “1” subtracted.

  That is, in this case, after the special display control is executed in the peripheral control board 510, for example, whenever information (game-related commands) indicating the progress of the game is acquired from the main control board 409, It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) have been consumed from the game in which the damaged image (“cracked image”) appears. Then, until it is determined that the predetermined number of games has been consumed, the production mode data table associated with the acquired latest information (various commands relating to the game) (a plurality of prepared tables may be provided). 1 may be selected), and one of a plurality of display effects (effect patterns) registered in the determined effect mode data table is selected.

  Then, the selected pressure is transmitted regardless of whether the pressure data (especially pressure value data here) transmitted from the pressure determination board 878 indicates that the display screen has been beaten or not. The effect information indicating the display effect (effect pattern) and the position data output to the liquid crystal control board when the special display control is executed are output to the liquid crystal control board. As a result, a game effect according to information (various commands related to the game) from the main control board 409 is performed while a damaged image (“cracked image”) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 590. It becomes like this.

  According to such a configuration, a “cracked image” appears in the dot matrix type display screen from when the beating action is performed on the display screen until the predetermined number of games is consumed. In the portion (abnormal assumption pixel), only white light emission display is performed over a plurality of games. That is, since the change as the display image is expressed only in the portion where the “cracked image” does not appear (normal assumed pixel) in the dot matrix type display screen, the beating action is performed on the display screen. The movement of the display effect appearing on the display screen becomes smaller (unauthorized effect control means) than before (legitimate effect control means). In such an effect with reduced movement (in this embodiment, an effect that makes it difficult to see the image), the expectation for giving the bonus game (the degree of false effect) is lowered, so that the display effect of the player This makes it possible to avoid the beating action on the display screen and the like. On the other hand, for a player who enjoys a display effect (a person who does not strike the display screen), an effect image with a large movement (a “cracked image” does not appear) so that a display effect with high expectation appears. ) Will be actively carried out, and it will be possible to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

  Finally, the pressure sensor for detecting the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a will be exemplified.

  The pressure sensor according to this embodiment is provided as four strain sensors (not shown) arranged at the four corners of the transparent plate 214a having a rectangular shape. These four strain sensors detect the strain (amount) generated at each location when the pressure is applied to the transparent plate 214a, for example, by changing the resistance value (amount), etc. Each is output to the substrate 878.

  That is, in such a pressure sensor composed of four strain sensors, when the magnitude of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a changes, the total amount of strain detected by each of the sensors changes. Further, when the position of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a is changed, the balance of strain amounts detected by the sensors is different. For example, when pressure is applied to the center of the transparent plate 214a, detection signals having substantially the same value are output from four strain sensors, while when pressure is applied to the upper right of the transparent plate 214a, four strains are output. The detection signal from the sensor arranged at the upper right of the sensors is a value indicating that the greatest distortion has occurred, and the detection signal from the sensor arranged at the lower left of the four strain sensors has the smallest distortion. The value indicates that it has occurred.

  Therefore, when the pressure determination board 878 receives the detection signals from the four strain sensors, the position of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a based on the balance of the strain amount is calculated, for example, by map calculation (strain Judgment is made based on a map in which the pressure position is associated with the balance of the amount. Based on this determination, position data indicating the position where the pressure is applied is created. In addition, the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a is calculated based on the amount of strain detected by the sensor, and the pressure indicating the pressure based on the calculated result. Value data will be created.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  In the above embodiment, the image data for damage is prepared in advance, and display output is performed based on the prepared image data for damage when a strike action is performed. However, based on the position where the strike action has been performed, image data for damage indicating that the damage spreads around the position (for example, “cracked image”) is created, and display output is performed based on the created image data for damage. You may make it perform. With such a configuration, it is possible to express a state in which cracks are generated in a different manner each time a hit is made.

  The determination as to whether or not there has been a beating action on the display screen may be made not on the pressure determination board 878 but on the peripheral control board 510 or the liquid crystal control board side. However, in this case, the pressure determination board 878 is a part that transmits and outputs a detection signal from the pressure sensor as serial data. When the pressure is determined on the liquid crystal control board side, two data of the pressure value data and the position data are acquired from the peripheral control board 510. Further, when the pressure is determined on the peripheral control board 510 side, the position data is output to the liquid crystal control board only when the pressure data (pressure value data) indicates that a beating action has been performed on the display screen. Even so, it is possible to display a damaged image.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when there is a touch (touch operation) with an appropriate finger pressure on the display screen, it is recognized that the gaming machine is equipped with a pressure detection function (pressure determination means). This may be performed for a casual production that is difficult. For example, when execution of a bonus game is confirmed in a gaming machine that performs a specific light-emitting effect with a predetermined probability only when execution of a game advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus game) is confirmed When there is contact (touch operation) on the display screen with an appropriate finger pressure, an effect that increases the predetermined probability that the specific light emission effect is performed (because the contact is made with an appropriate finger pressure). Or a production that is difficult to recognize whether it was performed without contact with moderate finger pressure). However, in this case, in the pressure determination board 878, whether or not there is a beating action on the display screen on the peripheral control board 510 side, and a predetermined area of the display screen (for example, an area where a specific light emission effect is performed). Thus, data (pressure value data) capable of determining whether or not a touch operation has been performed with an appropriate finger pressure is transmitted and output. Further, the peripheral control board 510 determines whether or not the magnitude of the pressure is within a predetermined appropriate range (appropriate finger pressure) based on a detection signal from the pressure sensor, and the determination result Is output to the liquid crystal control board. Then, the liquid crystal control board reads out image data for touch operation corresponding to a dedicated display effect from the image ROM (liquid crystal data ROM board) when there is a touch operation based on such a determination result, and for the touch operation Display output is performed separately for each pixel of the dot matrix type in the drive output mode indicated by the image data (liquid crystal output substrate).

  In each of the above embodiments, the so-called normally white type effect display device 590 is adopted, but the so-called normally black type (the liquid crystal panel has minimum transmittance (black display) when no voltage is applied). A method in which the transmittance increases when a voltage is applied) may be employed. However, in this case, a black display appears in the portion where the “cracked image” appears.

  In each of the above embodiments, four strain sensors are used as pressure sensors. However, any sensor can be used as long as it can obtain a detection signal that can determine the position and magnitude of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a. . As such a sensor, for example, a transmitter provided at a corner of the panel and a reflection array that reflects a surface acoustic wave (ultrasonic wave) emitted from the transmitter so as to reach the pressure detection region (transparent plate 214a). And a receiver for receiving the surface acoustic wave (ultrasonic wave) reflected by the reflective array, and when pressure is applied to the transparent plate 214a, the surface acoustic wave (ultrasonic wave) at that portion is attenuated. Then, a sensor (so-called ultrasonic surface acoustic wave type sensor) that detects the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a by using the fact that it is received by the receiver can be used. When this ultrasonic surface acoustic wave type sensor is employed, the magnitude of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a based on the attenuation amount of the surface acoustic wave (ultrasonic wave) received by the receiver. In addition, the position where the pressure is applied is determined based on the time from when the attenuated surface acoustic wave is emitted by the transmitter until it is received by the receiver.

  When it is determined that a striking action has occurred at a portion of the transparent plate 214a provided on the front surface of the reel 301, for example, “a mode in which red light emission blinks and displays at a position where pressure is applied”. It is also possible to perform a light-emitting display in which a damaged portion spreads around a position where pressure is applied.

  Further, as a means for determining whether or not a hit is applied to the display screen, it is not necessary to determine the position and magnitude of the pressure applied to the transparent plate 214a. It may be used to determine the vibration of the transparent plate 214a. In short, if a physical quantity that changes when a force is actually applied to the transparent plate 214a can be determined, it can be determined whether or not an impact has been applied to the display screen.

  In addition, the following technical thought can be grasped | ascertained from the gaming machine of this embodiment mentioned above. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination.

(Technical thought 1)
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device having a dot matrix type display screen partitioned into a plurality of pixels;
The contents of the display effects appearing on the display screen are determined based on the state information concerning the progress of the game acquired from the main control means, and the drive signals corresponding to the determined contents of the display effects are determined. Sub-control means for performing display control on the display device by outputting each pixel separately,
The sub-control means is
A pressurizing action judging means for judging a position of the pressurizing action and a magnitude of a force applied by the pressurizing action when there is a pressurizing action on the front transparent plate of the display device; and When it is determined by the pressurizing action determining means that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold, the plurality of pixels are assumed to be normal separately from those pixels based on the position where the pressurizing action has occurred. A damaged portion determining means for classifying the pixel into either a pixel or an abnormal assumption pixel;
While the abnormal assumption pixel among the normal assumption pixel and the abnormal assumption pixel classified by the damaged part determining means is caused to appear a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect, For normal assumed pixels, by outputting a driving signal in accordance with the contents of the determined display effect, a display mode at the time of abnormality appears only on a part of the dot matrix type display screen. A gaming machine characterized in that the control related to the progress of the game by the main control means can be continued.

  As described above, in a gaming machine, if the result of a game production with a sense of expectation on the display device is contrary to that expectation, the player strikes the display device as a retaliatory measure against such a betrayal act. There is a concern to do. On the other hand, when there is such a beating action, for example, it is conceivable to perform a damage process (for example, turning off the power) that suggests that the gaming machine is broken. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to appeal the fragility of the gaming machine, and thereby it is possible to promote the suppression of the beating action by the player.

  However, since it is rare for a gaming machine to be broken just by striking the display device, in such a gaming machine, it is easy for the player to say that the above-described damage processing is only a kind of production. There is a concern that will be recognized. And once it is recognized by the player in this way, there is a possibility that the display device is likely to be beaten in order to see such an effect. In addition, some players feel disgusted that the game can be interrupted even though the gaming machine is not actually broken.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, when the sub control unit of the main control unit and the sub control unit performs a pressurizing action on the front transparent plate of the display device, A pressure act judging means for judging the position and the magnitude of the force applied by the pressure act, and determining that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold by the pressure act judging means And a damaged portion determining means for classifying the plurality of pixels into either normal assumed pixels or abnormal assumed pixels separately from the pixels based on the position where the pressing action is performed. While the abnormal assumption pixel out of the normal assumption pixel and the abnormality assumption pixel classified by the damaged portion determination means, a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect appears. For the normal assumed pixels, the display mode at the time of abnormality appears only on a part of the dot matrix type display screen by outputting a drive signal in accordance with the content of the determined display effect. Thus, the control related to the progress of the game by the main control means can be continued.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to continue the control by the portion of the gaming machine that is difficult to be adversely affected by the strike (such as control related to the progress of the game), and only the portion that is easily affected by the strike (display screen) appears to be damaged. It becomes like this. In addition, only the above-described abnormal assumed pixels that are selected based on the hit position on the display screen appear to be damaged. Therefore, a person who strikes the display screen has to be aware of the possibility that the display device has been damaged due to the real situation that only the part that has been beaten in this way has an adverse effect. And from the fear of being held socially responsible for such actions, he will be careful not to do such actions thereafter.

  In addition, as a specific method for classifying a plurality of pixels into either normal assumption pixels or abnormal assumption pixels separately from those pixels, the following is possible: In addition to “a method of appropriately classifying normal assumed pixels and abnormal assumed pixels based on them (direct classification method)”, a plurality of pixels are classified in advance into normal assumed pixels and abnormal assumed pixels. A method to selectively use the most corresponding data based on the position where the pressurization action was performed after preparing the multiple pressurization data. Etc. can also be adopted.

  In addition, the act of applying pressure to the front transparent plate includes an act of applying pressure (blow) to the front transparent plate as well as an act of applying pressure (blow) to the front transparent plate. Therefore, as a method for determining such a pressure act, for example, a method for determining a physical quantity that changes when pressure is actually applied to the front transparent plate (strain or vibration of the front transparent plate). Also, it is possible to adopt a method for detecting the act of applying pressure to the front transparent plate itself (such as an infrared sensor device for enabling non-contact calculation of the speed of an object coming to the front transparent plate). .

(Technical thought 2)
The sub-control means is
Data acquisition means for acquiring effect image data in which drive signal output modes for the plurality of pixels are shown separately for each of the pixels, and among the effect image data acquired by the data acquisition means, the abnormal assumption pixel Has a data modification means that can modify the data part corresponding to
When it is not determined by the pressurizing action determining means that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold, the drive signal is based on the effect image data acquired by the data acquiring means. While performing the display control so that the content of the determined display effect appears on the display screen,
When it is determined by the pressurizing action determining means that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold, the drive signal is generated based on the effect image data modified by the data modifying means. According to the technical idea 1, the display control is performed so that a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect appears in the abnormal assumption pixel of the normal assumption pixel and the abnormal assumption pixel by outputting The gaming machine described.

  In this case, the data acquisition means, for example, prepares a plurality of effect image data in advance, and the effect image data based on the state information from the main control means and the content of the determined display effect. One of them will be acquired selectively.

  According to such a gaming machine provided with the data modifying means capable of modifying the rendering image data used in the normal state that is not beaten, when it is classified into normal assumed pixels and abnormal assumed pixels ( The display image data is modified so that a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect appears only in the abnormal assumption pixel of the normal assumption pixel and the abnormal assumption pixel. Is done. Then, a drive signal is output based on the effect image data modified in this way. Therefore, in addition to the production image data used in the normal state, the portion corresponding to the normal assumed pixel is in the normal state without preparing dedicated image data in the abnormal state. While the display mode appears, the display mode when in an abnormal state can appear in the portion corresponding to the abnormal assumed pixel.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to perform display output in an area classified as a normal assumed pixel in the display screen. Therefore, it may be possible to display a warning that there has been a beating action using such an area. However, this will cause the player to recognize that the game machine is equipped with a beating action detection function (pressurizing action judging means). It may be the cause of the suspicion that only the display output may be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine described in the above technical idea 1, in the gaming machine described in the above technical idea 2, a display effect when in a normal state appears indifferently in a portion corresponding to a normal assumed pixel. ing. Therefore, it is difficult for a person who strikes the display screen to judge whether or not the game machine is equipped with a beating action detection function (pressure act judging means), thereby damaging the display device. Be more conscious of the possibilities.

(Technical thought 3)
The damaged part determining means includes
When it is determined by the pressurizing action determining means that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold, the position where the pressurizing action is performed in the dot matrix type display screen. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of pixels are classified into a normal assumption pixel and an abnormal assumption pixel according to the pixels so that the abnormal assumption pixels are spread and distributed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, as in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the magnitude of the force applied by the pressurizing action determination unit exceeds a predetermined threshold value. When it is determined that the pixel is normal, the plurality of pixels are normally separated from the dot matrix type display screen so that the abnormally assumed pixels are spread and distributed around the position where the pressure action is performed. It is more desirable to classify the pixel into one of the assumed pixel and the abnormal assumed pixel in order to make a person who strikes the display screen aware of the possibility of damaging the display device. In other words, in this case, the position where the player has been beaten is detected, and the abnormally assumed pixels are spread and distributed around the detected position, so that the player's beaten and damaged part (abnormally assumed pixel) It becomes possible to clarify the causal relationship with the appearance.

(Technical thought 4)
The sub-control means is
By outputting a drive signal only to the normal assumption pixel among the normal assumption pixel and the abnormality assumption pixel, a display mode at the time of abnormality appears only in a part of the dot matrix type display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3.

  Since the drive signal is not output to the abnormal assumption pixel selected based on the hit position, the display screen is actually damaged and its display function is lost. The situation appears as it is. As a result, a person who strikes the display screen must be strongly aware of the possibility that the display device has been damaged. And from the fear of being held socially responsible for such actions, he will be careful not to do such actions thereafter.

  However, in this case, the data modifying unit in the technical idea 2 is acquired by the data acquiring unit so that a drive signal is not output to the abnormal assumed pixel among the normal assumed pixel and the abnormal assumed pixel. The rendered effect image data is modified.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the slot machine from the front upper right. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. (A) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional enlarged view of a connector part, (b) is a cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the state which moved the connector holder. It is the perspective view which looked at the game unit of the state which opened the front opening-and-closing member from the front upper right. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game unit from back upper right. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the connector from the connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the connector from the connector holder. It is the perspective view which looked at the connector holder from back lower left. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view of a connector part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the state which moved the connector part. (A) is a perspective view which shows the connection holding state of a connector, (b) is a perspective view of the binding band used in that case. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the connection holding state of a connector. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the front opening / closing member and the effect display apparatus from the front upper right. It is the expansion perspective view which looked at the front opening / closing member from the front upper right. It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view of the state which combined the front opening / closing member and the effect display apparatus, and the perspective view of a metal fitting. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the back upper right. It is a disassembled perspective view of a symbol variation display apparatus. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the reel from the front upper right. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which disassembled the reel from front upper left. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. It is a disassembled perspective view of FIG. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is the perspective view which looked at the power supply device from the front lower left. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is principal part sectional drawing of the door-type front member equipped with the transparent board. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. (A) is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction, (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the protrusion state of a coupling tool. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. (A), (b) is a perspective view which shows the operating state of a coupling tool. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the principal part in a coupling tool. It is a disassembled perspective view of a coupling tool. It is the rear view which looked at the coupling tool from the back side. (A), (b) is the sectional view equivalent to the AA line of FIG. 48 which shows the operating state of a coupling tool. It is a block diagram of the main control board arranged at the game unit side and the main relay board arranged at the main body side. It is a block diagram of the main control board and peripheral control board which were arranged at the game unit. It is a block diagram of a peripheral control board arranged on the game unit side and a peripheral relay board arranged on the main body side. It is a front view of the main relay board | substrate and periphery relay board | substrate accommodated in a wiring relay member. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN7 of the main relay board and each pin It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN3 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN2 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the number of pins of connector CN1 of a main control board, and the signal transmitted by each pin. Number of pins of connector CN3 of peripheral control board and signals transmitted by each pin, number of pins of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board and signals transmitted by each pin, and number of pins of connector CN2 and connector CN3 of peripheral relay board It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by each pin. It is a rear view of the door-shaped front member of the slot machine. It is a perspective view of a door board storage case. It is a simple circuit diagram of a door decoration drive board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the output sequence of serial data. It is the state which expand | deployed planarly the symbol row | line | column described on each reel belt | band | zone attached | subjected to each reel. It is the figure which shows the place which expanded the decorative member centering on the symbol display window. It is a figure for demonstrating the effective line of the slot machine of this embodiment. The combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine and its benefits are shown. It is a figure showing one basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine. It is the figure which showed each process performed by a starting process concretely. It is the figure which showed concretely the win value and internal lottery probability about all the winning combinations of the slot machine. It is the figure which showed concretely the win value and internal lottery probability about all the winning combinations of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the reel stop process by a "table system". It is a flowchart which shows the content of the determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the BB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the RB game start process start process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the RB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of RT demotion determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of RT promotion determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of RT game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of RT game completion | finish determination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect image in each stage, (a) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of 1st stage, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of 2nd stage, (c) is the 1st The figure which shows an example of the effect image of 3 stages, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 4th stage. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a special stage. It is a figure which shows a bet number display meter. It is a figure which shows a bonus expectation degree display meter. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image which appears when it is judged that there was a beating action.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 50 Game unit 80 Connector 100 Outer main body 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 103 Top plate 104 Back plate 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step part 107 Attachment piece 108 Attachment piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharge device 111 Medal auxiliary storage box 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Main relay board 122 Main relay board 123 Peripheral relay board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal board 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 134a Through hole 200 Door-shaped front member 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Insert port 205 Bet button 206 Bet button 207 Medal selector 2 8 Medal return button 209 Reservation medal release button 210 Start lever 211 Reel stop button 212 Medal １３ 213 Return 樋 214 Transparent window 215 Locking device 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 219 Groove unit 220 Door opening detection switch 220 Door opening detection switch 220 Door Opening detection switch 221 Bass speaker 230 Design plate 300 Design variation display device 301a Reel 301b Reel 301c Reel 302 Device case 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Cover body 310 Frame portion 311 Partition portion 312 Mounting hole 314 Substrate case 315 Reel main relay board 318 Backlight relay board 320 Motor mounting plate 321 Reel motor 321a Left reel motor 321b Middle reel motor 321c Right reel motor 3 2 Backlight 330 Side member 330b Circular housing portion 330c Anti-rotation protrusion 330a Through hole 331 Light-shielding piece 333 Slit 351a Reel band 351b Reel band 351c Reel band 400 Case member 401 Opening 402 Reinforcement bar 403 Bottom plate 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through-hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 441 Function separation relay terminal plate 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight part 444 Reinforcement band 450 Game state display board 452 Unit Side guide part 453 Main body side guide part 454 Bundling band 455 Band part 456 Head 457 Locking claw 458 Logo display part 460 Unit side through hole 460a Groove part 460b Through hole 461 Main body side through hole 462 Protruding part 463 hole 464 Hole forming member 465 Entrance guide portion 466 Delivery guide portion 467 Guide surface 468 Drain portion 469 Screw 469a Free hole 500c Braking member 500b Housing portion 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Front opening / closing member 502a Illuminating device 502b Reflecting member 508 Receiving portion 509 Engaging portion 509 Reference numeral 510 Peripheral control substrate 512 Speaker 515 Housing portion 515a Peripheral wall 516 Opening portion 520 Opening portion 521 Metal plate 522 Metal plate 523 Front side portion 524 Receiving portion 525 Rear side portion 526 Hole 530 Male screw 550 Uneven surface 551 Substrate case unit 552 Substrate case lower portion 553 Substrate case upper portion 554 Small substrate case 590 Production display device 591a Graphic display window 591 Display panel 591a Opening portion 592 Liquid crystal inverter substrate 593 Motor 594 Panel decoration relay board 595 Board 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 605 Lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Lamp 614 Lamp 700 Connector 801c Opening 805 Swing restricting part 820 Extendable arm 850 Main door relay board 851 Connection connector for medal selector 852 Reservation medal settlement button connection connector 853 Bet button connection connector 854 Bet button connection connector 855 Start lever connection connector 856 Reel stop button connection connector 857 Error release switch connection connector 858 To body connection connector member 859 To body connection Connector member 860 Door decoration drive board 861 Top decoration board connection connector 862 Upper left decoration board connection connector 863 Left lower decoration board connection connector 864 Right Decoration board connection connector 865 Lower right decoration board connection connector 866 Lower panel illumination lighting board connection connector 867 Speaker connection connector 869 Speaker connection connector 869 Pressure determination board connection connector 871 Top decoration board 872 Upper left decoration board 873 Lower left decoration Substrate 874 Upper right decorative substrate 875 Lower right decorative substrate 876 Lower panel illumination lighting substrate 877 Lower panel illumination 878 Pressure determination substrate 900 Door substrate storage case 901 Door decoration drive substrate storage portion 902 Main door relay substrate storage portion 903 Storage case cover 903 Reference numeral 910 Connector 920 Connector

Claims (3)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device having a dot matrix type display screen partitioned into a plurality of pixels;
The contents of the display effects appearing on the display screen are determined based on the state information concerning the progress of the game acquired from the main control means, and the drive signals corresponding to the determined contents of the display effects are determined. Sub-control means for performing display control on the display device by outputting each pixel separately,
The sub-control means is
When there is a pressing action on the front plate provided with transparency so as to cover the display device from the front surface , the position where the pressing action is applied and the magnitude of the force applied by the pressing action A pressurizing action determining means for determining, and when the pressurizing action determining means determines that the magnitude of the applied force exceeds a predetermined threshold value, Damaged part determining means for classifying a plurality of pixels into either normal assumption pixels or abnormal assumption pixels separately from the pixels,
While the abnormal assumption pixel among the normal assumption pixel and the abnormal assumption pixel classified by the damaged part determining means is caused to appear a display mode different from the content of the determined display effect, For normal assumed pixels, by outputting a driving signal in accordance with the contents of the determined display effect, a display mode at the time of abnormality appears only on a part of the dot matrix type display screen. A gaming machine characterized in that the control related to the progress of the game by the main control means can be continued. The display device is provided as a liquid crystal display device.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1.   In the display device, a variable display by symbols is performed.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.